679321
46
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/154
Pagina verder
TV
Loewe bild 5
Loewe bild 4
bild 5.65 oled
bild 5.65 set
bild 5.55 oled
bild 5.55 set
bild 4.55 oled
User handbook
36892020
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
2
Imprint
Loewe Technologies GmbH
Industriestraße 11
D-96317 Kronach
www.loewe.tv
Editorial date 06/17-1.0 SB/PS/TB
© Loewe Technologies GmbH, Kronach
ID: 4.2.10.0
The screen graphics used are only exemplary. Depending on the device
type, the available hardware/software components may be different.
All rights including translation, technical modifications and errors
reserved
.
Imprint
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
3
Table of contents
Imprint ...........................................................................................2
Welcome ........................................................................................ 5
Delivery specification ..................................................................5
About this user handbook ........................................................................... 5
Safety/Warning ............................................................................ 6
Remote control button mapping ................................................8
Operating controls on the TV set ...............................................9
Connections rear side of the device ........................................ 10
Preparing the TV set ...................................................................11
Installing the TV set ..................................................................................... 11
Set covers ..................................................................................................... 11
Cable fixing ................................................................................................... 11
Connecting the TV set ................................................................................12
Switching the TV set ON/OFF ...................................................................14
General information on menu operation ................................. 15
On-screen displays ..................................................................... 18
Explanation of keys ......................................................................................18
Explanation of symbols ..............................................................................18
Automatic menu info ..................................................................................18
Permanent clock display ............................................................................18
Initial installation ....................................................................... 19
Initial installation wizard ..............................................................................19
TV set as a monitor ....................................................................................30
Home view ................................................................................... 31
Home view - Favourites ..............................................................................31
TV .................................................................................................32
Setting the volume .....................................................................................32
Select station ..............................................................................................32
Status display/Info key ..............................................................................34
Function list (TV mode) .............................................................................35
Electronic Programme Guide – EPG........................................................36
Teletext ......................................................................................................... 39
Rotating the TV set .....................................................................................40
HbbTV / MediaText .....................................................................................41
Picture in Picture (PIP) ...............................................................................42
Recordings ................................................................................. 43
Digital Recorder ..........................................................................................43
TV viewing with time shift .......................................................................43
Archive recording .....................................................................................44
Multi recording .........................................................................................45
DR+ archive ..............................................................................................46
DR
+
Streaming ........................................................................................50
Follow-Me function ..................................................................................50
Multiroom .....................................................................................................51
Timer ............................................................................................................52
Sources .......................................................................................55
Video ............................................................................................................56
Video playback ............................................................................................56
Additional functions for DR+ archive playback ......................................59
Audio ............................................................................................................62
Audio playback ...........................................................................................62
Photo ............................................................................................................64
Photo playback ...........................................................................................64
Apps .............................................................................................65
App Gallery ..................................................................................................65
Browser ........................................................................................................67
DVB radio .....................................................................................................68
Internet radio ...............................................................................................69
System settings .........................................................................70
Picture ...........................................................................................................71
Sound ........................................................................................................... 73
Stations ........................................................................................................75
Automatic scan TV+Radio ..................................................................... 76
Manual Scan TV / Radio ......................................................................... 77
Station lists TV / Radio ........................................................................... 79
Compose / edit Personal list ..................................................................80
Update station list automatically ............................................................81
Transfer all station lists .............................................................................81
Control .........................................................................................................82
Language ..................................................................................................83
EPG ............................................................................................................83
Parental lock .............................................................................................84
Energy efficiency ......................................................................................85
Quick start mode .....................................................................................85
Software update.......................................................................................86
On-screen displays ...................................................................................91
Time and date ...........................................................................................91
DVB settings .............................................................................................92
PIP .............................................................................................................. 92
DR
+
...........................................................................................................93
Standard Teletext .....................................................................................94
HbbTV .......................................................................................................95
Asterisk key function ..................................................................................95
Hard disks .................................................................................................96
Export log file ............................................................................................ 97
Network settings ......................................................................................98
Multimedia settings ................................................................................101
Home Automation ..................................................................................101
Renderer ..................................................................................................101
Mobile Recording ...................................................................................102
Bluetooth ................................................................................................ 103
Connections ..............................................................................................105
Sound components ..............................................................................106
Antenna DVB ............................................................................................111
AV connection settings ...........................................................................111
Digital Link ................................................................................................112
HDMI .........................................................................................................112
Extras ..........................................................................................................113
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
4
Table of contents
DR+ Streaming .......................................................................................113
Integrated features .................................................................................114
Reset to factory settings ........................................................................114
Conditional Access module (CA module) ...........................................115
External devices ........................................................................117
Devices to the HDMI connections ........................................................... 117
Digital Link HD ............................................................................................118
Devices on AV .............................................................................................119
Connecting the speaker system (AUDIO OUT) ....................................121
Connecting the speaker system (DAL) ..................................................121
Connecting active loudspeakers ............................................................ 122
Connecting the HiFi/AV amplifier ........................................................... 122
Audio playback from external devices ................................................... 123
IR-Link ........................................................................................................ 123
Serial interface RS-232C (RJ12) ............................................................. 123
Setting the remote control ...................................................................... 124
Teaching the remote control .................................................. 125
Technical Data ..........................................................................129
Signals via AV (PC IN) / HDMI .................................................................131
Signal input groups ...................................................................................131
Accessories ............................................................................... 132
Loewe App ................................................................................................. 132
Upgrade kits / conversion kits / cables ................................................ 136
Mounting options ..................................................................................... 137
Environment .............................................................................138
Disposal .....................................................................................138
Licences ....................................................................................138
Miscellaneous ........................................................................... 139
Important hints on the special features of OLED technology ............ 139
VESA standard .......................................................................................... 139
CA module error codes ...........................................................................140
Glossary .................................................................................... 141
EC Declaration of Conformity.................................................144
Index ..........................................................................................145
Service .......................................................................................149
Code page .................................................................................150
Notes ......................................................................................... 152
System settings (continuation) ..............................................113
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
5
Welcome
Thank you,
for choosing a Loewe product and having placed your trust in us.
With Loewe you have not simply decided on a modern and technically
innovative TV set, but for timeless design, sharp picture quality, brilliant
sound for movies and music as well as intuitive operation with the
Loewe remote control unit, smart phone or tablet. In short, Loewe is
perfect for home entertainment – Made in Germany.
We look forward to welcome you as our customer and hope that you
enjoy your Premium Home Entertainment made by Loewe.
Many features, one result:
perfect Home Entertainment.
Just more entertainment.
The Loewe os user interface is intuitive and graphically
optimised. This is how you quickly find your desired content
– from TV set to online.
See chapter: Home view.
Perfectly networked.
Thanks to its numerous connections, your Loewe TV
becomes your entertainment centre. Connect it to the
Internet, DVD/Blu-ray player, external speakers, etc.
Hard disk for your TV archive.
Record the TV programme or pause it and continue watching
it at a later date. With DR+ (Digital Recording), all this is no
problem for your Loewe TV set.
See chapter: Digital Recorder.
Your contact person.
We are happy to help you with any questions regarding your
TV set and other Loewe products.
In the user handbook refer to Service.
Customer
Care
Center
Delivery specification
TV set
Instruction manual 1
Rotation unit (only with bild 5 set variant and bild 4oled)
Table stand base plate (only with bild 5 set variant and bild 4 oled)
Welcome Box:
Remote control assist with two alkaline batteries type AAA
Mains cable
Antenna cable
Operating instructions 2 (these instructions)
Table stand mounting instructions (only with bild 5 set variant
and bild 4 oled)
Velcro cable ties
Screws for assembly option (only with bild 5 set variants and
bild 4 oled)
Tool set for mounting of the installation option
About this user handbook
For best results regarding safety and the longevity of the set, we
recommend you read the chapter For your safety before switching
the TV set on for the first time.
The chapter glossary gives explanations of certain terms used in the
TV set and the user handbook.
Paragraphs which begin with the symbol
indicate important
instructions, tips or conditions for the following settings.
Terms which you will find in the menus or printed on the remote control
or TV set are written in bold type.
The necessary control elements are shown in the descriptions to the
left of the text containing the instructions for action.
Depending on the connected accessory equipment the menus in the
TV set can differ from those described here. The screen graphic dis-
played is only an example. Depending on the device type, the available
hardware/software components may be different.
All the station names, programme contents, the illustrated photos,
titles, albums and album covers in this user handbook are examples.
In addition to the remote control, a PC keyboard can be connected to
one of the USB ports on your TV and then used to control your TV set.
In the user handbook, this symbol indicates places in
which the use of a keyboard is particularly advantageous.
The operating manual and the user handbook for your TV set
are updated at irregular intervals. We recommend an occasional
examination on the Support Portal of the Loewe homepage.
General information on the operation of the
TV set
For further information on the user interface and the general operation
of your TV set see chapter General information on the operation.
Interactive data services
In some countries the stations also broadcast interactive data services
with their programmes, leading to the functions of individual keys not
being available or only so to a limited extent. You can find out more
about this in chapter TV, section HbbTV/MediaText.
Important information
Loewe does not accept any liability for the nature and content of
receivable Internet services. This also applies to the Loewe MediaNet
portal. With its devices, Loewe provides the technical platform that
fundamentally enables such material to be received. Loewe cannot
make any guarantees regarding changes in scope and content,
particularly with regard to the future and after going to press. The
receivable online services are not included in the delivery and can vary
depending on the product and country.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
6
Safety/Warning
For your safety, and to avoid unnecessary damage to your unit, please
read and follow the safety instructions below.
Key
This symbol indicates risks caused by high voltages.
This symbol indicates dangers caused by the development
of fire.
This symbol should alert the user to other, more specific risks.
This symbol indicates dangers caused by sharp edges.
Do not remove set rear panel
Warning: When opening or removing the rear panel, there is the dan-
ger of electric shock and the risk of serious injury from high voltages.
Never open the rear panel yourself. Leave repairs and servicing work
on your TV set to qualified, authorised television technicians.
Please contact your dealer or our customer service.
Intended use and environmental conditions
This TV set is intended exclusively for the reception and
playback of picture and sound signals.
The TV set is designed for dry rooms (living rooms and office
spaces). It must not be operated in spaces with high humidity
(for example, near or in a bath or sauna).
We point out that our TV sets can react sensitively to dust and
soot particles in the ambient air.
Excessive amounts of these can lead to damage to the set, up
to loss of function.
Ensure a clean environment, so that your set will not be
damaged.
High humidity and dust concentrations lead to power leaks in
the set. This can lead to danger of injury and damage to the set
by electric tensions or a fire.
If the set is used outdoors, make sure therefore that it is
protected against moisture (rain, dripping or splashing water
or condensation).
If you’ve brought the set from the cold into a warm environment,
leave it off for around an hour due to the formation of
condensation.
Do not place objects filled with liquid on the
set. Protect the set from dripping and
splashing water.
Candles and other open flames must be
kept away from the set at all times, to pre-
vent the spread of fire..
ATTENTION
ELECTRIC SHOCK DANGER–
DO NOT OPEN
Transport
Improper handling during transportation can lead to damage
to the display and risks of injury.
The OLED screen consists of glass or plastic and can break if
handled improperly.
Only transport the set in a vertical position.
Only handle the TV set at the display corners. The correct
handling is shown in the operating instructions 1.
Do not place it on the lower edge so as to reduce the danger of
damage and contamination.
Mains cable/power supply
Incorrect voltages can damage the set.
This set may only be connected to a mains power supply with
the voltage and frequency indicated on the rating plate using
the enclosed mains cable.
The mains power plug of the TV set must be easily accessible
so that the set can be disconnected from the mains at any time.
When pulling the mains power plug out, do not pull the cable
but the plug housing. The cables in the mains power plug could
be damaged and cause a short circuit when plugged in again.
A mains power cable with a damaged insulation can lead to
electric shock and presents a fire hazard. Never use a damaged
mains cable.
Lay the mains cables so that they cannot be damaged. Do not
tread on the mains cable.
The mains cable must not be kinked or laid over sharp edges.
Air circulation and high temperatures
Like any electronic device, your TV set requires air for cooling.
If air circulation is impeded, it may result in a fire.
The ventilation slots on the rear panel of
the set must therefore remain free.
Please do not cover the set.
Wall mounting: Leave at least 10 cm of
space all around the set at the side,
above and below.
Table / stand foot: Leave at least 10 cm
clear space around the set at the side
and at the top.
Foreign bodies
Foreign bodies inside of the set can lead to short circuits and
fires.
Danger of injury and damage exists
Therefore avoid metal parts, needles, paper clips, liquids, wax
or similar passing through the ventilation slits of the rear
panel into the interior of the set.
Should something get into the interior of the appliance, im-
mediately pull out the mains power plug of the set and inform
the customer service department for checking.
Safety/Warning
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
7
Safety/Warning
Installation
Opting for an incorrect or wrongly mounted installation can
lead to danger of accidents Rolling or falling sets can cause
injuries or damage.
Loewe TV sets are specified for Loewe accessories. We strongly
recommend the use of original Loewe installation options.
Do not use any installation options that are not approved for
your TV set.
Note the instructions regarding the mounting for the different
possible installation options. A corresponding documentation
is included with every Loewe product.
Check before the installation of the set, whether the final loca-
tion with regard to the surface (pressure sensitivity) and stabil-
ity (static) is designed for the load from the set. This applies in
particular to high-gloss lacquered surfaces and surfaces made
of real wood, real wood veneer and plastic surfaces.
Only place the TV set on a levelled, stable, horizontal base with
table or stand foot. The set should especially not protrude at
the front when installing in or on furniture.
The usual usage position of the TV set should be followed. The
TV set can only be operated horizontally upright
A
. The
inclination can amount to a maximum of 10 degrees for wall
mounting
B
. The TV set must never be operated in portrait
orientation,
C
, horizontal
D
or overhead on the ceiling
E
.
Position the set so that it is not exposed to direct sunlight and
additional heating from radiators.
Do not place the TV in a location where vibrations can arise.
This can lead to damage.
In the case of installation options for third-party manufacturers
with a motor drive, it is to be ensured that the adjustment of the
TV set does not occur manually. It is generally not advisable to
use the installation options of other manufacturers with locking
devices in certain positions.
When using accessories from third-party manufacturers, it is
to be ensured that the TV set is easily adjusted for the respec-
tive installation option.
When adjusting the TV set, ensure that
the pressure applied to the set frame
is not too great. Especially in large
format displays, there is the danger
of damaging the display.
The mounting of a TV set on a On a holder according to the
VESA standard requires mandatory use of the VESA adapter
bolts. Otherwise, damage to the TV may result.
The Vesa adapter bolts must be attached to the TV set with a
torque of circa 4 Nm. You can obtain these from your Loewe
dealer (you can find further information in chapter Miscellane-
ous, section VESA standard).
±10°
D
A B
C
E
D
Supervision
Do not let unsupervised children handle the TV set nor let them
play immediately around the TV set.
The set could be knocked over, moved or pulled down from the
stand surface and injure people.
Do not leave the TV set when switched on unattended.
Volume
Loud music can lead to hearing damage. Avoid extreme sound
volume, especially over extended periods of time and when
using headphones.
Thunderstorms
During thunderstorms, pull out the mains power plug and all
connected antenna cables from the TV set.
Over-voltages due to lightning strike can damage the set both
via the antenna system and via the mains power supply.
Even in the case of prolonged absence, the mains power plug
and all connected antenna cables should be disconnected from
the TV set.
Cleaning and care/chemicals
Before cleaning, switch the TV set off using the mains power
switch.
Damages caused by chemicals can lead to adverse effects and
development of fire.
Never expose the set or accessories to aggressive (for example,
corrosive) chemicals such as alkalis or acids.
Only clean the TV set, the front screen and the remote control
with a damp, soft, clean and colour neutral cloth, without any
aggressive or scouring cleaning agents.
The loudspeaker panel of your TV set is textile-covered. Hoover
the surface regularly with a soft brush attachment.
For contaminations or stains:
Moisten a soft, colour neutral cloth with detergent solution or
commercially available stain remove and rub the stain gently
away. You can also treat the stain directly with a commercial
dry stain remover spray (hoover up the dust).
Do not moisten the covering fabric directly with detergent solu-
tion or stain remover (risk of stain circle formation). Do not use
solvents to clean the fabric.
Note the usage instructions of the manufacturer when using
stain remover.
When cleaning loudspeaker panels which have been exposed
to nicotine, there is an increased risk of stain circle formation.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
8
Remote control
(1
The assignment of these keys can be changed. The description refers to the standard setting. The factory setting of the keys can vary depending on the firmware version
of the remote control.
(2
Depending on the settings HbbTV mode on/off, start behaviour of HbbTV station (System Settings
ט
Control
ט
more ...
ט
HbbTV)
.
(3
In case of device type bild 4 oled to an externally connected USB hard disk.
Remote control button mapping
Depending on the selected operating mode (TV/Video/Audio/Photo/Apps) and function (e.g. DR+, EPG, PIP, Teletext, HbbTV, etc.), the key assignment
may differ from the assignment described here (see the corresponding chapter).
1
Sound mute/on.
2
LED display for currently operated device.
3
Call the TV mode.
4
Reassign remote control to SetTop-Box
(1
(presetting: Apple TV).
5
Pressing briefly
: Open the DR+ archive.
P
ressing longer
: Call timer.
6
Pressing briefly
: Add current object to Home favourites.
P
ressing longer
: Open App Gallery. (standard assignment)
(1
7
EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) on/off.
8
Teletext/MediaText
(2
on/off.
9
Pressing briefly
: Call function list for the active operating mode.
P
ressing longer
: Call System settings.
10
V+/V- increase/reduce volume.
11
Pressing briefly
:
Call station list.
Pressing longer
: Call
expanded station list.
In the menu: confirm/call up.
12
Green coloured key: screen on/off in Audio/Radio mode.
13
Red coloured key: call preferred value-added network service, if available
(
2
.
14
Pressing briefly: skip backwards.
Pressing longer: winding backwards.
15
Pressing briefly: direct recording (with determination of recording duration)
(
3
.
Pressing longer: One Touch Recording
(
3
.
16
Pause / Start/pause the timeshift television
(
3
.
17
Stop / End timeshift (return to live image)
(
3
.
18
Pressing briefly: skip forwards.
Pressing longer: winding forwards.
19
Play / Start/continue timeshift television
(
3
.
20
Blue coloured key: call station function list
(selection of language/sound, subtitles or channel/video track).
21
Pressing briefly: Yellow coloured key: call history.
Pressing longer: Yellow coloured key: call last station.
22

Navigation on the user interface, select objects.
In the menu / lists: select/set.
23
P+/P– next/previous station.
24
Pressing briefly: step / level back.
Pressing long: close all displays.
25
Press briefly during an on-screen display: info display. Info text appropriate to the content
that can assist you further, should you have any questions about your TV set.
Press briefly, without on-screen display: access status display. With status display open
and repeatedly pressing the key call the detailed information on the broadcast.
Press longer: show Explanation of keys.
26
PIP (picture in picture) on/off.
27
Call up the Home view.
28
Select stations with numeric buttons directly.
In the menu: enter numbers or letters
29
Call Sources.
30
Reassign remote control to video device
(1
(presetting: BluTech Vision 3D).
31
Call radio mode (standard assignment)
(1
.
32
Switches the TV set on (mains switch must be turned on) or switches to standby mode.
Press briefly while TV set is switched on: TV set and all CEC-enabled devices connected to
the HDMI ports will be switched off to standby (System Standby).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
31
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
32
17
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
9
1
Mains switch:
The mains switch is located on the backside of the set.
Always return the TV set to Standby mode before switching it off
with the main switch.
2
Display:
white: TV set in standby.
Depending on the ambient brightness, the
white LED display is dimmed
(1
and lights
up with a different degree of brightness.
If the TV set is in quick start mode, the
white LED display is not dimmable and
starts with full brightness.
white, intermittent:
TV set starts.
green: TV set switched on.
red: timer recording active.
blue:
TV set in standby and background operation active (EPG
data updating, software update or DR+ streaming server
function, OLED calibration).
3
IR receiver:
Infrared receiver for receiving the remote control commands.
Operating controls on the TV set
Operating controls on the TV set
(1
Automatic dimming depending on the room brightness (OPC) must be activated (see chapter System settings, section Picture).
3
2
1
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
10
5
6
8
9
15
7
12
19
18
16
17
2 1
13
14
20
10
11
21
22
3 4
K
Connections rear side of the device
Position and function of the connections
(1
The adaptor is available as an accessory from your dealer.
(2
HDMI sources that provide UHD AND HDR or Dolby Vision content should be connected to this port.
Mains switch
Slot for Kensington lock
DIGITAL AUDIO LINK - Surround audio outputs (digital) – (RJ45)
4
AC IN - Mains connection
Mains socket – 220-240 V ~ 50 / 60 Hz
5
LAN - Network connection
RJ-45 – Ethernet / Fast Ethernet
6
HDMI 1 ARC - HDMI input 1 (with Audio Return Channel)
HDMI – Digital Video IN (4k@60Hz/4:2:0)/Audio IN/OUT
7
HDMI 2 - HDMI input 2
HDMI – Digital Video IN (4k@60Hz/4:2:0)/Audio IN
8
ANT TV - Antenna/cable analogue /
DVB-T/T2 / DVB-C
IEC socket – 75 Ohm / 5 V / 80mA
9
ANT SAT 1 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 1) DVB-S/S2
F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA
10
ANT SAT 2 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 2) DVB-S/S2
F socket – 75 Ohm / 13/18 V / 500mA
11
SPDIF OUT - Audio output (digital)
Cinch socket (orange)
12
USB 3.0 - USB connection
USB type A – USB 3.0 (max. 900mA)
1
2
3
13
HEADPHONE - Headphone connection
Jack 3,5 mm – Headphones 32–200 Ohm
14
HDMI 3 - HDMI input 3
HDMI – Digital Video IN (4k@60Hz/4:2:0)/Audio IN
15
AUDIO OUT - Audio output (analogue) L/R – (
Jack 3,5 mm)
16
RS-232C - Serial interface
(1
– (RJ12)
17
AV - Micro AV socket
(1
Audio/Video IN with Scart adapter:
Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)
CVBS (VHS/8 mm)
RGB
L/R
Audio/Video IN with VGA adapter:
PC/STB video signal
PC formats (RGB, H, V)
Component (YPbPr)
L/R
18
COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 1 (standard V1.3)
19
COMMON INTERFACE - CI slot 2 (standard V1.3)
20
HDMI 4 UHD - HDMI input 4
(2
HDMI – Digital Video IN (4K@60Hz)/Audio IN
21
USB - USB connection
USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)
22
USB - USB connection
USB type A – USB 2.0 (max. 500mA)
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
11
Installing the TV set
Mounting options / Installation notes
Your Loewe dealer can also assist you in finding other mounting
options. Look for the corresponding directions in the installation
instruction.
Choose a place for installing your TV set where no bright light or
sunlight shines directly onto the screen. This could cause reflections
which impair the picture.
3 times the screen diagonal can be taken as a guide value for the
viewing distance (e.g., for a 55-inch set approx. 4.2 m for SD signal).
The viewing distance can be reduced with an HD/UHD signal.
Set covers
Covers for rear and side connections
In order to remove the rear side cable covers pull them simply from
the device.
To fit the cover, insert the lugs at the top edge of the cover into the
corresponding cut-outs in the rear panel and push up the cover until
it snaps in.
The side cover of the TV set can also be completely removed. For this,
open it as far as it will go and gently pull on the open cover.
The cover detaches from the holder and gives free access to the
connection area. To replace the cover, simply push it until it latches
back into place.
A cable bushing connects the lateral and posterior terminal region. In
this way you can pass the cables of the lateral connections through
and lay them out together with the rear connecting cables.
Preparing the TV set
Cable fixing
Using the Velcro cable tie supplied, you can fix the rear cables.
When the TV set is mounted on the Table Stand, the connection cables
are fixed to the Table Stand (see figure).
When using a wall bracket (Wall Mount is available as an accessory
from your specialist dealer), the connection cables are fixed to the
two recesses on the rear of the device (see figure).
With the detachable cable holders
A
, you can additionally fix the rear
connection cables to the rear of the housing.
Table Stand Wall Mount
A A
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
12
Connecting the TV set
Connecting to the mains supply
Remove the cover for the connections.
Connect the TV set to a 220-240V mains socket:
First plug the smaller plug (small connector) of the power cord into
the AC inlet (AC IN) on the TV set, and then the larger connector (Euro
plug) into a mains socket.
Connecting antennas
Cable (analogue)/DVB-C/DVB-T antenna:
Plug the cable of antenna, cable TV system or room antenna into the
ANT TV socket.
If you want to use analogue cables/DVB-C connection and a DVB-T
antenna together, use an external antenna switch (available from
your dealer).
Satellite antenna DVB-S:
Depending on the used satellite system, connect a connecting cable
from the multi-switch or directly from the LNC to the ANT-SAT and
ANT-SAT2 sockets of the TV set respectively.
When connecting the TV set to a single cable community antenna,
connect the ANT-SAT and ANT-SAT2 sockets directly to the
appropriate SAT antenna socket.
When connecting the TV set to a DiSEqC single cable community
antenna (in accordance with EN 50494), connect the ANT-SAT
socket directly to the appropriate SAT antenna socket.
In case of a DiSEqC one cable communal system you require only
one antenna cable. Further distribution of the signal to the two
reception routes is accomplished by the TV set’s satellite tuner.
It is possible, however, to continue using an existing SAT cabling
with two antenna cables in a DiSEqC one cable communal system.
If two transmission channels of the DiSEqC single cable community
exist, one system channel is used per satellite antenna cable.
Ask your dealer in this regard.
Connecting the TV set to the Home network
You may link your TV set to the home network by a wired connection
(Ethernet, Powerline adapters separately available) or by a wireless
radio connection (WLAN). For wireless connections, the TV set has
an internal WLAN antenna.
In order to play back data from your home network your Loewe TV
supports the UPnP AV standard.
You call the network wizard to configure the network adaptor (System
settingsטMultimedia/NetworkטNetwork settingsטNet-
working).
Under no circumstances may the TV set be wired and at the same
time connected by a wireless connection to the same network, e.g.
router. This may cause severe operational faults!
Example for a wired connection
Connect the LAN socket of your TV set to the LAN switch/router of
your home network with a network cable (available from your dealer).
R TV
Cable
analógica /
DVB-C
DVB-T DVB-S
DSL
Switch / router inalámbricoTelevisor
PC
Preparing the TV set
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
13
Preparing the TV set
Example for a wireless connection
You can connect the TV set to your home network by a wireless radio
connection via the WLAN antenna inside the set.
Shadow effects of various materials, such as reinforced concrete,
metal surfaces, etc., attenuate the WIFI signal sometimes
significantly or completely.
Help for configuration problems
Loewe cannot provide any support for PC hardware and software or
network components owing to the diverse configuration options with
home networks.
Please contact the administrator of your home network and/or specialist
dealer for support when setting up and for maintenance of network
connections, storage media, media server software and network devices
such as routers.
DSL
WLAN router
TV set
PC
Preparing the remote control unit
Removing the battery protection
The remote control is supplied with batteries. To make them ready for
use, remove the plastic flag out as shown below.
Inserting or replacing batteries
Press on the embossed arrow whilst pushing the battery cover down.
Only use leak-proof micro-cells of the LR 03 (AAA) Alkali-Manganese
type. Do not use different types of batteries and old and new batteries
together.
The batteries used must not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunlight, fire or similar!
The position of the batteries is indicated in the battery compartment
(in opposite directions). Pay attention to the correct polarity of +
and – when inserting the batteries.
If the batteries are too weak after longer use, the TV set prompts you to
change the batteries. Dispose of used batteries in an environmentally
friendly way (see chapter Environment/Legal information).
Push the cover back on from below after having inserted the batteries.
Adjusting the remote control unit for operating the TV set
Press the TV key.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
14
Switching the TV set ON/OFF
(1
Automatic dimming depending on the room brightness (OPC) must be activated (see chapter System settings, section Picture).
Switching the TV set ON/OFF
Switching TV set to the standby mode
Switch the mains switch on the backside of the device to position I.
The display in the Loewe eye will illuminate white after a short time.
The set is now in standby mode.
Meaning of the colour of the LED in the Loewe “eye”:
white: TV set in standby.
Depending on the ambient brightness, the
white LED display is dimmed
(1
and lights
up with a different degree of brightness.
If the TV set is in quick start mode, the
white LED display is not dimmable and
starts with full brightness.
white, intermittent:
TV set starts.
green: TV set switched on.
red: timer recording active.
blue:
TV set in standby and background operation
active (EPG data updating, software update
or DR+ streaming server function, OLED
Calibration).
After switching on the TV set, it takes a few seconds for further
operating commands to be processed (Exception: Quick start
mode, see chapter System settings, section Control – Quick
start mode). Your TV set is ready to operate as soon as the status
indicator in the Loewe Eye lights up in green.
Loewe Eye
Mains switch
Switching the TV set on by means of the remote control
Press the on/off key.
Or:
Press the TV key.
The previously watched station will be called.
Or:
Press numerical keys 1-9.
The corresponding station will be called.
After switching on the TV set, it takes a few seconds for further
operating commands to be processed (Exception: Quick start
mode, see chapter System settings, section Control – Quick
start mode).Your TV set is ready to operate as soon as the status
indicator in the Loewe Eye lights up in green.
Switching the set off with the remote control (Standby)
Press the on/off key.
Before switching off the set with the mains switch,
we recommend you to switch it to standby mode.
Switching off the TV set and connected additional devices
(System standby)
Press on/off key long:
Switch TV set and all CEC-capable devices connected
to the HDMI interfaces OFF to Standby mode (System
Standby).
Quick start mode
If you enable the Quick Start Mode and you switch on the TV set from
standby, the TV picture can be immediately seen without delay. You
can specify the times at which your device will be in the Quick Start
Mode. Please note that in this case you will have a higher energy
consumption.
You can find the Quick Start Mode under System settings ט Control
ט Quick start mode.
Default setting for the Quick Start Mode: off
.
Technical information
Switching off the TV set with the mains switch during operation or
an inadvertent disruption to the power supply (e.g. power failure)
can cause damage to the hard disk file system and hence loss of the
recorded broadcasts.
Never ever disconnect the USB storage device from the TV set during
a copy process. Before switching off the set with the mains switch, we
recommend you to switch it to standby mode.
However, if unexpected problems occur when operating a hard disk,
formatting the hard disk may rectify this. Refer to the instructions in
chapter System settings, section Control – Hard disks. This applies
also to the use of external USB hard disks with the TV set.
Loewe are not liable for the loss of data on the integrated hard disk
of your TV set. To avoid data loss, we recommend copying important
recordings to an external storage medium.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
15
General information on menu operation
The most important keys for navigation will be explained in general.
The numbers in the text refer to the figure showing the remote control
in chapter Remote control.
The arrow keys
22
help you to navigate in the menus and lists of the
TV set and for selecting menu items. They are arranged in the middle
of the remote control in a circle around the OK key
11
. Later in this
user handbook they will be represented as follows:
 Select the desired item.
The OK key
11
is used to confirm a selection, for calling the highlighted
menu item and for opening the station list. In this user handbook, an
instruction for this key looks like the following:
OKconfirm.
Using the numerical keys of your remote control
29
you enter
programme channels and teletext pages directly. With key
you
open the source menu. In this user handbook, entering numbers with
numerical keys is shown as follows:
Entering programme channel directly.
The numerical keys are also used to enter text (see chapter General
information on menu operation,section Entry of characters by
remote control).
The Home view is the central overview page for all of your TV set‘s
operating modes. You reach Home view with the HOME key
27
.
HOME: Call Home view.
Pressing the BACK key
24
briefly brings you one level up in the wizard.
Pressing the BACK key longer closes all opened fade-ins. An example
for the BACK key in this user manual:
BACK: Stop text entry and exit entry box.
Pressing longer on the INFO key
25
displays an explanation of the
most important key functions of the current operating mode (e.g. TV
mode, teletext, PIP, etc.).
If the function for a key is not available, this will be indicated by an
inserted symbol
on the right above.
Structure of the Menu screen
Basically, the structure of the different menu screens is similar,
depending on the fact if a wizard, rendering media content or a setup
menu are concerned. The structure is explained by means of three
different illustrations.
Screen structure: Wizard
(A) Title bar with name of the wizard and the current operating step.
(B) Selected items, whose number can be different according to the
operating step.
(C) Bottom line showing the available operating controls. If required,
instructions and information are inserted.
Screen structure: Rendering of media content (example:
Audio player)
(A) Title bar with selected album / subdirectory.
(B) Menu item Back to exit the menu or to go back to the previous
menu item.
(C) Selection of album or title
(D) Time bar
(E) Bottom line with the different symbols for controlling the playback
function.
B
A
C
A
C
B
D
E
General information on menu operation
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
16
General information on menu operation
Screen structure: Setup (example: picture)
(A) Selected function in the Home overview (here: system settings)
(B) Home Menu System settings, with selected menu item Picture.
(C) Menu items Picture focusing on Contrast.
(D) Help text for the selected menu item Picture > Contrast.
Navigation: Selection of elements (example: On-screen displays)
Highlighting and thus selecting the symbols/elements or menu items
on the screen can be effected by the arrow keys on the remote control.
So you can see all the time where you are. As soon as there is a bar
above a symbol or text, this is a selected element.
(A) Selectable elements / menu items.
(B) The writing of the line in which the relevant selectable menu item
can be found is white.
(C) Move the selection marking by means of the arrow keys 
to the menu item to be set.
The position of the marking is to see by a grey rectangle.
The newly selected menu item must be confirmed by selecting
OK. The previously active item’s text colour will change to grey;
the newly selected item will change to white.
A CB
A
B
C
Navigation: Wizards
If the menu item(s) (marked white) is/are already
correctly preset:
Go to next step.
Otherwise:
Mark the menu item that you want to change.
The update will be adopted automatically.
The fount colour of the previously active
item will change to grey. If not,
OK confirm the selection.
Go to next step.
Navigation: Element selection in lists using initials
Using the numerical keys of the remote control you can jump into list,
e.g., Internet radio station lists.
If the list is sorted in alphabetical order, you jump to the entered letter.
For example, when pressing the key 7 three times you jump to the first
list element starting with letter R.
In case of numerical sorting, you can directly select the stations with
the numerical keys.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
17
General information on menu operation
Entering characters with on-screen keyboard
For certain functions, entering letters or characters is required, e.g., for
Web addresses (URLs) in the browser or for renaming archive entries.
An on-screen keyboard appears for entering text.
 Select character/on-screen button,
OK Adopt character.
In the event of letters with a triangular, additional
letters are displayed when pressing the OK button
longer (2 sec).
For the selection of special characters use the .-/
field.
To conclude the entry:
 Select Adopt,
OK confirm the selection.
Entry of characters by remote control
Alternatively to the on-screen keyboard you can also enter the desired
characters by means of the remote control (as with the keypad of a
mobile phone).
 Select text entry field.
Under the 1st letter of the name you will see a line
indicating the current input position.
Input position one character to the right (also for
blanks).
Input position one character to the left.
Input the letters one after another. When using the
remote control, press the numerical keys just as on
a mobile phone keypad (0-9) until the desired symbol
is displayed. The available letters are printed on the
individual numeric buttons.
You find the exact key assignment in the character
table in the right column.
To conclude the entry:
 Select Adopt,
OK confirm the selection.
Table of characters for entering text by means of the remote
control
Key Characters (uppercase - lowercase)
1
[space] 1
2
A B C 2 Ä Æ Ã Å Ā À Á Ć Ç Č - a b c 2 ä æ ã å ā â à á ć ç č
3
D E F 3 Ė Ë Ē Ę Ê È É - d e f 3 ė ë ē ę ê è é
4
G H I 4 Ï Ī Į Î Ì Í - g h i 4 ï ī į î î ì í
5
J K L 5 - j k l 5
6
M N O 6 Ö O E Õ Ō Ô Ò Ó Ø - m n o 6 ń ñ ö o e õ ō ô ò ó ø
7
P Q R S 7 ß - p q r s 7 ß
8
T U V 8 Ü Ū Û Ù Ú - t u v 8 ü ū û ù ú
9
W X Y Z 9 - w x y z 9
0
. 0 - / _ : + , ; ? ! = & # % ~ @ $ * ( ) § \ { } [ ] < > ´ ` ^ |
Function list
The function list, where available will open when clicked on. The func-
tion list contains Settings and Additional Options.
Depending on when the function list is selected (e.g. station is dis-
played, station list activated, DVB Radio is used, etc.), the selectable
menu items of the function list may vary.
The menu items of the function list are described in the respective
chapters.
An example of a function list of the used station list:
OK call station list,
MENU: call function list.
 select function,
OK confirm the selection.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
18
On-screen displays
Explanation of keys
An explanation of the main operating keys that can be used at the
moment, can be displayed.
The availability of the key explanation is dependent on the currently
active operating situation.
INFO press longer: show Explanation of keys.
INFO or BACK: hide Explanation of keys.
Explanation of symbols
A text box will temporarily be displayed for screen pages with remote
control symbols in the footnotes as soon as the symbol is selected
.
Automatic menu info
The automatic menu info provides an info text for the selected menu
item appropriate to the on-screen display that can assist you further
with the operation of your TV set.
An on-screen display is displayed.
The factory setting is that the info display is shown
automatically for each menu item. In this case you can
temporarily hide the info texts with the INFO key.
Permanent clock display
The clock display can be permanently shown. It is always visible as
long as no other display is made.
You can switch the permanent clock display on or off in Home view
under System SettingsטControlטmore ...ט On-screen displays.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
19
Initial installation wizard
Initial installation after switching on for the first time
The Initial installation wizard starts automatically with an initial
installation. It may be called repeatedly again (see chapter System
settings,section Extras – Repeat initial installation).
If a parental lock is activated, the access code must be entered
before repeating initial installation (see chapter System settings,
section Control – Parental lock).
For information on navigation within the wizard refer to chapter
General information on menu operation.
First installation wizard routine
The selected settings affect the routine of the Initial installation wizard.
 Select desired Menu language.
OK Confirm selection.
Selecting the language of the user guidance is the
wizard’s first step. Then you simply follow the
instructions on your TV screen.
Proceed to next step.
A licence agreement will be displayed.
 Scroll through the licence agreement.
OK Confirm the licence agreement and proceed to
the next step.
 Select Energy efficiency.
OK Confirm selection.
Determine how energy efficient your TV set shall
be. The value for the contrast (and thus the
brightness of the background lighting) is adapted
and the automatic dimmer activated or
deactivated depending on the presetting.
The automatic shutdown is active in the mode
Home Mode.
Menu
language
Energy
efficiency
Home mode:
The emphasis for home use is on low energy
consumption. The automatic dimmer is activated.
Premium mode:
This mode optimises the settings to a brighter
environment at a higher energy consumption. The
automatic dimmer is activated.
The use of this energy efficiency setting must be
confirmed afterwards once again.
Shop mode:
The picture settings are aligned to operation in
the presentation room. The automatic dimmer is
deactivated. If the ambient brightness diminishes, the
energy consumption is not reduced.
The use of this energy efficiency setting must be
confirmed afterwards once again.
Not all image and sound settings will be stored in
the shop mode. These settings will be reset to the
factory default settings after re-starting.
The presetting can be changed later in the System
settings under Control ט Energy efficiency.
Proceed to next step.
 Select Location of TV set (national defaults
are adopted).
OK Confirm selection.
For certain locations (e.g., Australia), there is finally
a selection screen where you can indicate in which
state/territory the device is being operated.
Proceed to next step.
 Select the Operating mode.
OK Confirm selection.
Use the TV set as a TV set:
Continued with Connect antennas cable(s) (see
next page).
Use the TV set just as a monitor:
see chapter Initial installation, section TV set as a
monitor.
Energy
efficiency
(continued)
Location of
TV set
Operating
mode
Initial installation
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
20
Initial installation
Select antenna cable.
OK Connect/disconnect antenna cable.
Select the antenna cables that are connected to
your TV.
Ahead of each selected antenna, the symbol
appears.
Cable analog: analogue stations via
cable
Terrestrial (DVB-T): digital stations via
antenna
Cable (DVB-C): digital stations via
cable
Satellite (DVB-S/cable 1): digital stations via
satellite
Satellite (DVB-S/cable 2): digital stations via
satellite
Proceed to next step.
The rest of the initial installation wizard routine
depends on the selected antennas (Cable analogue,
DVB-T, DVB-C, DVB-S) in step Connect antennas
cable(s).
The different antennas/types of reception are
described in the following sections of initial installation.
Connect
antennas
cable(s)
Setting options for reception via Cable analog:
If you have not selected Cable analog in step Connect antenna
cable(s) in the initial installation, proceed to the next section Setting
options for DVB-T reception
.
The selection of a Colour standard is only required
when the Location of TV set Other country was
selected. Otherwise, the country-specific default
settings will be preset when selecting the Location
of TV set. This step will be skipped then
 Select appropriate colour standard.
OK Confirm selection.
Proceed to next step.
TV/col.
standard
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
21
Initial installation
Setting options for DVB-T reception:
If you have not selected Terrestrial (DVB-T) in step Connect
antenna cable(s) in the initial installation, proceed to the next section
Setting options for DVB-C reception.
If several networks are available via DVB-T, you can
decide which network you want to receive your
channels from.
Select network,
OK Confirm selection.
Proceed to next step.
 Select and adapt settings for DVB-T reception.
OK Confirm selection.
Scrambled
stations
You can state whether coded stations are to be
searched for in the search/update.
Select yes to save all found scrambled stations.
However, these stations can only be received in
connection with a CA module and the appropriate
Smart Card.
The handling of the CA module is described in the
chapter System settings, section Extras – CA
module.
Search
method
If you want to run the station search independently
of the channel grid, select Frequency search for
the search method.
Accept
Logical
Channel
Number
In various countries, digital stations (DVB-T) are
transmitted with a preset channel number per
station, known as Logical Channel Numbers (LCN).
If you select yes here, these default channel slots
will be used and the channels of the preferred signal
source will be sorted as per LCN. The stations in the
station list can no longer be shifted.
Network
selection
Please state from which network you wish to receive your station.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the button.
Freeview
other network
Network selection (DVB-T)
Back with Proceed with
OK
Settings
Supply
voltage
DVB-T
antenna
Select supply voltage no (0V) / yes (5V).
If you use a DVB-T antenna that requires a supply
voltage (active antenna) and which is not already
supplied via a power adaptor, then select yes (5V)
for the antenna’s power supply.
How to align your DVB-T antenna is described in
chapter System settings, section Connections
Antenna DVB.
Proceed to next step.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
22
Initial installation
Setting options for DVB-C reception:
If you have not selected Cable (DVB-C) in step Connect antenna
cable(s) in the initial installation, proceed to the next section Setting
options for DVB-S reception.
If several networks are available via DVB-C, you can
decide which network you want to receive your
channels from.
The normal DVB-C settings are derived from the
selection of the location or network and do not need
to be changed.
Exactly which of the following settings are present is
dependent on which network is selected.
 Select network.
OK Confirm selection.
Proceed to next step.
 Select and adapt settings for DVB-C
reception.
OK Confirm selection.
Scrambled
stations
You can state whether coded stations are to be
searched for in the search/update.
Select yes to save all found scrambled stations.
However, these stations can only be received in
connection with a CA module and the appropriate
Smart Card.
The handling of the CA module is described in the
chapter System settings, section Extras – CA
module.
Search
method
If you select Frequency search here, a search is
performed for all receivable stations.
With Network search, only the stations which
the networks supply are searched - either for
all receivable networks or only for the particular
network specified under Network ID.
Start
frequency
The DVB stations are only searched for in the
frequency range above the start frequency.
Network
selection
Settings
Network ID
If you select none here, DVB signals of all current
transmitter networks are searched automatically
(recommended for most cable networks).
If, on the other hand, you specify a certain network ID
(necessary in the cable networks of some countries),
only DVB signals of this broadcasting network are
searched for automatically.
Your cable provider has the information you need.
Accept
Logical
Channel
Number
In various countries, digital stations (DVB-C) are
transmitted with a preset channel number per
station, known as Logical Channel Numbers (LCN).
If you select yes here, these default channel slots
will be used and the channels of the preferred signal
source will be sorted as per LCN. The stations in the
station list can no longer be shifted.
Proceed to next step.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
23
Initial installation
Setting options for DVB-S reception:
If you have not selected Satellite (DVB-S/cable x) in step Connect
antenna cable(s) in the initial installation, proceed to the next section
Setting options for all types of reception.
 Select network.
OK Confirm selection.
If several networks are available via DVB-S, you can
decide which network you want to receive your
channels from.
Proceed to next step.
 Selecting the satellite system.
OK Confirm selection.
Specify how you receive which satellite(s) (single
satellite or type of satellite system). Ask your
dealer in this regard.
The normal DVB-S settings are derived from the
selection of the location and do not need to be
changed in most cases.
Single
satellite
Reception of a single satellite via a connected LNC
(LNB).
2 satellites
on 22 kHz
switchbox
Reception of two different satellites with two LNCs
(LNBs) which are connected to the TV set by a 22
kHz switchbox.
2 satellites
on toneburst
switch
Reception of two different satellites with two LNCs
(LNBs) which are connected to the TV set by a
toneburst switch.
Max. 4
satellites
on DiSEqC
multiswitch
The TV set controls a DiSEqC multiswitch to which
up to four LNCs (LNBs) for different satellites are
connected.
Network
selection
Select
satellite
installation
DiSEqC
one cable
communal
system
Select setting if the TV set is connected to a DiSEqC
single-cable system (according to EN 50494). Several
Sat receivers can be connected to one Sat cable.
other
communal
installation
Select setting if the TV set is connected to a
single-cable system (without DiSEqC). Several
Sat receivers can be connected to one Sat cable.
Contrary to a DiSEqC one cable communal system
there are restrictions in the range of certain reception
frequencies in "common" single-cable community
systems.
Proceed to next step.
The rest of the initial installation wizard routine
depends on the selected satellite system in step Select
satellite installation.
The different satellite systems are described in the
following sections of initial installation.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
24
Initial installation
Setting options for the satellite system (single satellite):
 Select satellite,
OK Confirm selection.
Proceed to next step.
 Select Dual band (low/high) or Single band.
OK Confirm selection.
Here you specify if you use a Dual Band (Universal)
LNB or a Single LNB.
Proceed to next step.
 Set LNB frequencies.
OK Adopt settings.
The setting of the LNB frequency is only called
when you have used the setting Single band
in step Dual / single band.
Normally, you do not need to change the values
for high and low band, unless the LNC (LNB) of
your satellite system uses a different oscillator
frequency (important for the frequency display).
Proceed to next step.
Proceed to section Setting options for DVB-S
reception (continued).
Select
single satellite
Dual/single
band
LNC
frequencies
Setting options for the satellite system (2 satellites on 22
kHz switchbox / 2 satellites on toneburst switch):
 Mark Satellite 1 / Satellite 2,
 select satellite.
OK Adopt settings.
Proceed to next step.
 Set LNB frequencies.
OK Adopt settings.
Normally, you do not need to change the values
unless the LNC (LNB) of your satellite system
uses a different oscillator frequency (important
for the frequency display).
Proceed to next step.
Proceed to section Setting options for DVB-S
reception (continued).
Satellite
selection
LNC
frequency
(22 kHz
Switch box)
LNC
frequencies
(Toneburst
switch)
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
25
Initial installation
Setting options for the satellite system
(max. 4 satellites on DiSEqC multiswitch):
 Select and adapt settings for the DiSEqC
multiswitch.
OK Adopt settings.
Repeat rate
The refresh rate determines how often a DiSEqC
command is output. A refresh is only necessary with
cascaded systems.
Control
voltage
The control voltage controls the switching of the
polarisation level (horizontal/vertical) in non-DiSEqC
capable components (e.g., control of single LNBs via
DiSEqC multiswitch).
22kHz signal
The 22 kHz signal controls the switching between
high and low band in the Band setting. The Position
setting controls the selection of the satellites in non-
DiSEqC capable components.
Toneburst
The Toneburst controls the selection of the satellites
in non-DiSEqC but Toneburst capable components
with the Position and Option settings.
Proceed to next step.
 Mark Satellite 1 ... Satellite 4,
 Select satellite.
OK Adopt settings.
Proceed to next step.
DiSEqC
multiple
switch
Satellite
selection
.
 Set LNB frequencies.
Normally, you do not need to change the values.
OK Adopt settings.
Proceed to next step.
Proceed to section Setting options for DVB-S
reception (continued).
LNC
frequencies
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
26
Initial installation
Setting options for the satellite system
(DiSEqC one cable communal system):
 Select One channel or Two channels.
OK Confirm selection.
Here you specify if you use one or two transmission
channels in your one cable communal system.
In case of two channels - as far as they are
available in your system - different stations can
be simultaneously viewed on the main picture and
on PIP.
You get more information on your system from
your dealer.
Proceed to next step.
Select DiSEqC single cable communal
installation.
OK Confirm selection.
Proceed to next step.
 Select satellites from list,
OK Confirm selection.
Proceed to next step.
Number of
system
channel used
DiSEqC
one cable
communal
installation
Satellite
selection
.
 Set LNB frequencies.
Normally, you do not need to change the
values unless the LNC (LNB) of your satellite
system uses a different oscillator frequency
(important for the frequency display).
OK Adopt settings.
Proceed to next step.
 Select and adjust settings for the DiSEqC
single cable communal installation.
OK Adopt settings.
The manual registration must be made for both ANT
SAT jacks when either two DVB-S antenna cables or
two system channels are used.
Transmission
channel
Select the desired transmission channel.
Transmission
frequency
Select the corresponding transmission frequency.
PIN protection
If your system is designed for it, it is possible to
protect your used transmission data from use by
other subscribers with a PIN.
Define/
change PIN
Here you can determine and change the PIN for
PIN protection. Only possible, when yes has been
selected for PIN protection.
Proceed to next step.
Proceed to section Setting options for DVB-S
reception (continued).
LNB
frequencies
Manual
registration
(for socket
ANT SAT)
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
27
Initial installation
Setting options for the satellite system (other communal
installation):
 Select satellite.
OK Confirm selection.
Proceed to next step.
 Select and adapt settings.
OK Confirm selection.
LNC
frequency
Normally, you do not need to change the values for
high and low band, unless the LNC (LNB) of your
satellite system uses a different oscillator frequency
(important for the frequency display).
Supply
voltage
If your set is connected to a single-cable system
without external voltage supply, you can connect
the antenna supply (13V or 18V / max. 500mA).
Proceed to next step.
Proceed to section Setting options for all types of
reception.
Select
single satellite
LNB
frequencies,
Supply
voltage
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
28
Initial installation
Setting options for DVB-S reception (continued):
After you have made the previous settings, you should
receive picture and sound of the selected satellites
(only possible for Astra1 and HOTBIRD).
Proceed to next step.
 Select and adapt settings.
OK Confirm selection.
If several satellites are received, the following settings
must be made for every satellite. The type of settings
available may differ depending on the selected satellite
or network.
Scrambled
stations
You can state whether coded stations are to be
searched for in the search/update.
Select yes to save all found scrambled stations.
However, these stations can only be received in
connection with a CA module and the appropriate
Smart Card.
Handling of the CA module is described in chapter
System settings, section Extras – CA module.
Search
method
If you select Frequency search here, a search is
performed for all receivable stations. With Network
search, from all receivable networks all the stations
are searched which are supplied by these networks.
Depending on the selected network, this step
might possibly be skipped.
Symbol rate
The symbol rate is specified by the satellite provider
and normally does not need to be changed.
Accept
Logical
Channel
Number
In various countries, digital stations (DVB-S) are
transmitted with a preset channel number per
station, known as Logical Channel Numbers (LCN).
If you select yes here, these default channel slots
will be used and the channels of the preferred signal
source will be sorted as per LCN. The stations in the
station list can no longer be shifted.
Proceed to next step.
Proceed to section Setting options for all types of
reception.
Test reception
Settings
Setting options for all types of reception:
You will see a list of the selected settings. You can go
back step by step with the key to make any changes
to the settings.
OK Start automatic search.
Now, the TV set searches for TV and radio stations.
It searches successively for stations from the selected
signal sources. The progress of search is shown by a
progress bar.
In case of a repeated initial installation routine (via
Home view under System settings
p
Extras)
all stored stations will be first deleted here.
The number of TV and radio stations found is dis-
played.
Proceed to next step.
.
 Select Age-related lock.
OK Confirm selection.
You can specify an age limit for your TV set here.
DVB broadcasts which have an appropriate age
identification are locked and can only be watched
after entering the access code.
In some countries, the yes/no option does not
exist for some channels, and a compulsory age
check must be entered.
Proceed to next step.
Check
search
settings
Info
station search
Age-related
lock
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
29
Initial installation
continued on the next page
p
The data capture for time and date is set to automatic
ex factory.
If time and date are automatically obtained via the
receive path, no entry is necessary.
For more information, see the chapter System
settings, section Control – Time and Date.
Proceed to next step.
Select sound components.
OK Confirm selection.
This selection indicates which sound components
you want to use to hear your TV sound. Depending
on the selection, the sound component wizard
starts with which you can make further settings.
The sound component wizard is described in
chapter System settings, section Connections –
Sound components and can also be started at
any time beyond the initial installation.
Proceed to next step.
Time and
date
Sound
playback
via ...
Select option.
With the selection, specify whether you want to
configure the available network adaptor now.
Configure now: Make settings for network
adaptor and proxy server (see chapter System
settings,section Multimedia / Network
Network settings).
Do not configure or configure later: Skip
network adaptor configuration.
When selecting Do not configure or configure
later the initial set-up assistant is closed.
Otherwise:
Proceed to next step.
Select option.
OK Confirm selection.
When selecting Information on new software
updates, your TV set checks at definite intervals
whether a newer software than the one installed in the
TV set is available in the Internet. A screen message
appears when a new software update is found.
Back: Exit wizard.
The initial installation wizard is complete.
Network
configuration
Inform about
new software
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
30
Initial installation
TV set as a monitor
You can also use your TV set just as a monitor, i.e. if you only use it with
a PC. The tuner in the TV set cannot be used in this mode.
 Select AV connection.
OK Confirm selection.
The selected AV connection is shown when
switching the TV on.
Proceed to next step.
Initial setup continues with the Time and date setup.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
31
Home view
The Home view is the central overview page of your TV set.
Via the selection list on the left, you can select the menu items: Home,
TV, Recordings, Sources, and Apps . Via System settings
you
have access to more functions and you can configure your TV set.
The right section of the display shows, depending on the selected
menu item, the current station list, favourites (also see right column)
and the available sources and/or apps.
Depending on the device configuration, network connection, media/
media servers available and the connected devices, the number of
selectable items may vary.
Call Home view
HOME: Calling the Home view.
 Select menu item / Favourite,
OK call.
Description of the individual menu items:
Home: Under the item Home all favourites of the different sections
are summarized.
TV: Via the Menuitem TV you can change the TV mode in the event
that another operating mode (e.g. radio, etc.) is selected. In the
right half of the screen, you can access the station of the currently
selected station list.
See chapter TV for further information.
Recordings
: Via the menu item Recordings you have access to DR+
archive (local/DR+ streaming where available) videos and connected
USB storage media. The timer (timer overview and timer services)
is likewise accessible via the menu item Recordings.
See chapter Recordings for further information.
Sources: Via the item Sources in the Home view, you can change to
sources in order to play back something from them. You can access
devices that are locally connected to the TV set (e.g. to AV, HDMI,
USB) as well as devices available via the home network.
See chapter Sources for further information.
Apps: Via the menu item Apps you can find multimedia content
on the Internet (App Gallery), Internet and DVB radio and a full-
featured browser.
See chapter Apps for further information.
System settings : In menu item System settings you find
the configuration menu of the TV set e.g., with settings for picture,
sound, connections or sound components.
See chapter System settings for further information.
Home view - Favourites
Under the menu items Home and Apps you will find your Favourites
on the right-hand side.
By selecting the individual menu items, your Favourites will be filtered
accordingly. When selecting Home the Favourites of both menu items
will be displayed together.
After an initial installation, some favourites will already be
automatically created depending on the installation site of the TV
set and of existing Internet links (e.g. TV stations, online links).
Creating favourites
In the operating modes of the TV set you can define the current object
(e.g. station, music title, teletext page, website, photo, etc.) as favourite.
In the selected operating mode, the active object will be added as
favourite and placed at the end.
Create favourite.
In the instance that there are more favourites than
can fit onto one screen page, they will be displayed
via a scroll list.
P+/P– Scrolling through the individual pages.
Editing favourites
You can edit the existing favourites in Home view. Change the
sequence of your favourites as you wish or delete favourites you do
not need any more.
Moving favourites
HOME: Calling the Home view.
 Select the favourite to be changed.
MENU: call function list.
Select Move.
OK call.
 Move favourite to new position.
BACK: Finish procedure.
Delete Favourites (individual)
HOME: Calling the Home view.
 Select the favourite to be changed.
MENU: call function list.
Select Delete.
OK call.
Delete Favourites (multiple selection)
Edit Favourites function list is retrieved.
Select Multi select.
OK call.
 Select favourite
OK highlight (highlighted item changes to blue),
where applicable apply to other favourites.
MENU: call function list.
Select Delete.
OK call.
Home view
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
32
TV
Via the menu item TV, which is selectable via the Home view, one
station can be selected from the current station list. By selecting a
station you will arrive in the TV mode.
In the TV mode there are a number of functions, such as Teletext, PIP,
EPG available to you. Via the individual function lists you can select
additional options and settings surrounding the TV operation.
Setting the volume
Switching sound off/on
Sound off.
Sound on: Press key again or increase the volume
using V+.
Setting the volume
V+/V– Volume up/down.
The volume indicator will be displayed in the center of
the screen.
The volume control bar can be deactivated in the
menu System settings ט Control ט more ... ט
On-screen displays.
Select station
Select station with P+ / P–
When using Instant Channel Zapping, you can very quickly switch to other
stations. The instant channel zapping technology uses the second tuner
in the background in order to pre-select the next stations. Due to this
pre-selection, you can now switch to this channel within a very short time.
While using the digital recorder DR+ (timeshift operation, archive
recording, multi recording) or in PIP mode, Instant Channel Zapping
is not available. Switching is done at „normal“ speed.
For encrypted stations Instant Channel Zapping is only possible to
a limited extent.
P+/P– Station up/down.
The number and the name of the station along with the
title of the programme and that of the next programme
will be briefly shown.
Also, the status display with time/
date and programme-dependent symbols appears.
The symbols of the status display are described in
chapter TV, section Status display.
Select station using the numerical keys
If you select an unoccupied station position, the next available
station is selected.
1-digit stations
Press the numerical key a little bit longer: The channel
will change immediately or press the numerical key
briefly, the station changes after 2 seconds (changes
immediately if up to 9 stations are stored).
2-digit and 3-digit stations
Press first (and second) numerical key briefly. Keep the
last numerical key depressed a little bit longer: The
channel will change immediately or: press all the numer-
ical keys briefly, the channel changes two seconds after
the last number has been entered (with up to 99 or 999
saved channels it will change immediately).
4-digit stations
Press all four numerical keys briefly, the station
changes immediately.
long
short short long
all short
Selecting a station out of the station list
In normal TV mode, without other displays:
OK Call station list.
 Mark stations.
OK The marked station will be called.
Changing the station list
In normal TV mode, without other displays:
OK Call station list,
MENU: Call function list.
Mark station list selection.
OK Call.
 Mark desired station list.
OK Call.
The station list is amended according to selection.
BACK: a long press: Close overlay.
Explanations of the station lists:
The number and the names of the possible station lists depend on
the available signal sources (antennas, TV reception networks, etc.).
ASTRA LCN
Analogue
DVB-C
DVB-T
Only stations from the selected source / reception
network are indicated in the station list.
Personal list
Only stations of the selected personal list are indicated
in the station list. The name of the list may be changed.
AV list
Exclusively AV inputs are shown in the station list.
Manage list
Call up the station list editing menu (System
settings ט Stations ט Station lists TV).
continued on the next page ט
TV
Volume / stations
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
33
TV
Station
Selecting stations by means of the expanded station list
In normal TV mode, without other displays:
OK Press long to call expanded station list,.
 Mark stations.
OK The marked station will be called.
Or:
For numerical sorting: Enter the channel number. The
marker will jump to the selected station.
OK The marked station will be called.
For alphabetical sorting: Enter the first letter. The first
station for the specified letters is marked.
 Mark the station.
OK The marked station will be called.
Filter and sort options of the expanded station list
Using the on-screen buttons on the bottom line of the expanded station
list you can filter and sort the station list by various options.
MENU: Switching between list and bottom line.
0..9
Numerical sorting of the station list.
A..Z
Alphabetical sorting of the station list.
Searching
This allows you to do targeted searches for stations.
The station name is to be entered via the on-screen
keyboard. The entry is described in chapter General
information on the operation.
Station list Select the list, the stations of which are to be dis-
played in the extended station list (e.g., Analogue,
DVB-C, DVB-T, ASTRA LCN, Personal station list,
AV list).
All stations Here you can filter the content of the station list
according to various criteria. Shall All Stations,
only HD stations, stations that are Locked or
Scrambled or Unscrambled, CI+ Protected
stations be indicated.
Selecting stations by personal lists
You can save your preferred stations in personal lists (e.g., for several
users). Each personal list can contain up to 99 stations.
Personal list available (creating a new personal list
via Manage list ט New personal list).
In normal TV mode, without other displays.
OK Call station list.
MENU: Call function list.
Mark station list selection.
OK Call.
 Mark the desired personal list,
OK Call.
The station list is amended according to selection.
BACK: a long press: Close overlay.
OK Call personal list.
 Mark stations.
OK The marked station will be called.
Explanation of the icons following the station names:
Locked station.
HDTV station.
DVB-T station (digital terrestrial via antenna).
DVB-C station (digital via cable).
DVB-S station (digital via satellite).
Scrambled station.
History
Recently selected stations are saved in History.
In normal TV mode, without other displays:
Yellow button: call History.
 Select entry,
OK call.
The last station can also be accessed directly:
Yellow button press longer: Call last station.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
34
TV
Status display/Info key
Status display/Info key
In normal TV mode, without other displays.
INFO: Show status display.
Below you see the number and the name of the station
and (if available) the title of the current programme.
The bar (if available) indicates the progress of the
current programme. If information about the current
programme is available, this can be called by pressing
the INFO key again.
The field at the top left shows various additional pieces
of information, if available, which are represented by
symbols (see right column).
A window with button descriptions is displayed in the
bottom right corner. The automatic display of the
Explanation of keys with status display can be switched
off via System settings ט Control ט more ... ט
On-screen displays טKey explanation.
By pressing the INFO key longer the Explanation of
keys can be displayed regardless of the status display
(see also chapter On-screen displays, section
Explanation of keys).
The status display is shown automatically every time
you change channels.
The status display is hidden automatically at the end
of the display time.
If you want to hide the status display manually before
the display time ends, you can do this with the BACK
key.
Explanations of the symbols in the status display:
General symbols:
Language/sound selection available.
Subtitles available.
Channel selection for multi-channel providers.
HbbTV mode available from this station.
HDTV programme.
UHD programme.
HLG
HLG programme.
HDR 10
HDR 10 programme.
Dolby Vision programme.
Transmitted audio signal:
Mono
Mono audio transmission analogue.
Dual
channel
Dual channel sound transmission (Sound1/
Sound2) analogue.
1+1
Dual channel sound transmission (Sound1/
Sound2) digital.
ܐ
Stereo sound transmission digital (PCM).
Dolby Audio
Dolby Audio Bitstream Transmission.
MPEG
MPEG sound transmission.
Transmitted audio channels:
Dolby Audio - DD
Dolby Audio - DD+
Dolby Audio - TrueHD
Selected listening mode:
܃
Playback of centre sound or mono (left/right).
܃
Playback of front sound (L/R stereo).
܃
Playback of front and centre sound.
܃
Playback of front and surround sound.
܃
Playback of front, surround and centre sound.
܃6RXQG
SURMHFWRU
Playback of sound via sound projector.
܃([WHUQDO
VSHDNHUV
Playback of sound via speakers connected to an
external amplifier.
If the number of speakers appears in brackets, the sound of missing
speakers is transmitted by the existing speakers (virtually). The Dolby
Virtual speaker (VS mode) developed by Dolby is activated for the
virtual sound reproduction in sound mode (4) and (5). Here you
can choose between Dolby Virtual and Cinema Surround. In sound
mode (3), proprietory settings of Loewe are used for the virtual
reproduction.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
35
TV
Function list
Function list (TV mode)
The function list contains settings and additional options. Die individual
List items will be briefly explained as follows:
The function list can be opened for the current station or the selected
station list. Depending on this, some list items may possibly not
be available.
Function list for the current station:
MENU: Call function list.
Function list for the selected station list:
OK Call station list,
MENU: Call function list.
 Select function,
OK call.
Menu items in the function list for the current station:
Station list
selection
Exchanging the station lists.
Recordings
Here you can call up a recording dialogue.
Detailed info
Calling additional information on the current pro-
gramme.
Favourite
Storing the current station as a favourite.
Language /
sound
Selecting other languages and audio formats (if
available).
Subtitles
Display programme subtitles (if available).
Picture
Make frequently used picture settings.
Sound
Adjusting all available audio settings.
Headphone
volume
The headphone volume can be set independently of
the volume set for the TV speakers.
Screen off
You can turn off screen here. You can turn the
screen on again with the arrow button on the re-
mote control.
Store station
Here you can save the current station to a list that is
selected in the following step.
Expanded
station list
Here, you can open the entire station list in full screen
mode. You can filter it according to various criteria.
More
settings
You can apply all the settings on your TV set here.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
36
TV
Electronic Programme Guide
Electronic Programme Guide – EPG
EPG stands for Electronic Programme Guide and provides you with
on-screen programme details. With the system, as with a printed
programme guide, you can learn about the current programme. In
addition programmes can be memorised and also recordings can be
programmed.
Starting and ending EPG
EPG: Switch EPG on / off.
EPG is only available for DVB stations.
The first time you start EPG, a wizard will start that
guides you through the necessary presettings.
Depending on the number of stations selected for EPG,
it may take some time until the programme information
is displayed.
EPG wizard
In this dialogue you decide, for which station EPG data should be
collected and displayed. With the number of stations the time for
nocturnal data acquisition will increase. We recommend, also for
reasons of distinctness to select only those stations, which you receive
regularly.
When the EPG is started for the first time:
Continue in the wizard and call up the EPG Station
selection.
MENU: Switch between the station list and the
on-screen buttons in the bottom line.
Changing the station list:
 Mark station list in the bottom line,
OK select desired station list.
Select station for EPG:
 Mark the the single station,
OK Select / deselect station for EPG.
For display in the EPG, the selected stations are marked
with a check mark
.
Or:
 Select Mark all.
OK All stations of the station list will be activated for EPG.
Or:
 Select Unmark all.
OK No station is activated for EPG.
EPG Operation
In the left column there is a list of stations of the selected source/sta-
tion list (e.g. DVB-C, personal list).
P+/P– Scrolling in the station list page by page.
 Scrolling in the station list.
 Scrolling through the programmes.
The programmes currently running are high-
lighted in the station list by lighter fields. A white
line marks the current time in the running
programme.
OK short: (highlighted TV programme is running):
EPG will be closed and the programme is
selected.
short:
(highlighted programme not yet started):
Detailed information on the selected
programme will be called.
long: Change preview image to the station of the
highlighted programme.
INFO: short: Call detailed information on the selected
programme (see next page).
long: show Explanation of keys.
REC: Schedule the recording of the highlighted
programme.
EPG function list
EPG called
MENU: Call function list.
 Select function,
OK call.
Menu items in the EPG function list:
Station list
selection
Select station list to be displayed in the EPG.
Recording Programme recording of the selected programme.
Detailed info
Bring up detailed information on the selected
programme.
View View selected TV programme (for programmes
currently running).
Memorise Make a note of selected TV programme (for
programmes that have not yet begun).
Date Jump to a desired date.
Entry of
station/time
Jump directly to a time or station.
Change view Change EPG view between standard and com-
pressed.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
37
TV
Electronic Programme Guide
Calling additional information about the programmes
EPG called.
INFO: Call up detailed information.
If there is more information on the selected programme,
it will be indicated here.
You will find further options for the displayed station
in the function list menu.
Change to function list.
or:
MENU: change between detailed information and
function list.
 select function.
OK call.
or:
BACK: Leave detailed information and go back to EPG.
Menu items in the EPG function list (detailed information):
Recording Schedule the recording of the selected broadcast
for a time.
View/
Memorise
Watch or mark selected TV broadcast.
Previous
event
Information on the previous broadcast
Next Event
Information on the next broadcast
Timer list
Call up timer list.
Switching to the current broadcast
EPG called.
Mark current broadcast.
OK press briefly: switch to current broadcast.
The electronic programme guide will be closed.
Programme preview
EPG called.
 Mark desired station in the station list.
OK press long: show preview.
In the top left window, the current programme of
the selected station is displayed now.
When leaving EPG the station is displayed in the
preview thumbnail in the full picture.
Jumping to time or station
The marking must be in the station list.
Press the numerical key (0 through 9). The window
Select Time/Station is shown.
 Select time or station,
Enter numbers.
When entering a time, you always jump to the next
occurrence of the entered time (24-hour window).
If the time is already passed today, the time entered
will appear on the following day.
Always enter five digits for station presets, e.g.
00001 for preset 1 or 00134 for preset 134.
OK Activate jump.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
38
TV
Electronic Programme Guide
Recording a programme via EPG
You can programme timer recordings of TV programmes conveniently
using the EPG.
EPG called.
Select the desired broadcast.
RECORD key: Programme timer recording for the TV
programme.
Timer data dialogue is opened.
Check the timer data and update it if necessary (e.g.
directory, start, end, recording type).
See chapter Recordings,section Timer for explana-
tions of the setting options in the Timer data menu.
 Select Record station,
OK adopt.
Or:
MENU: Call function list
Select Recording,
OK adopt.
In the EPG a recording symbol
is placed behind the
title of the programme.
Memorising a programme via the EPG
A programme that has not started yet can be memorised. For memo-
rised programmes, the TV set will ask at the beginning of a programme
if it should change the channel accordingly or switch on from the
stand-by mode if this is activated in the menu System settings
p
Control
p
EPG
p
TV on when memorised.
EPG called.
Mark the desired programme.
OK Call up detailed information.
 Mark Memorise,
OK Memorise programme.
In the EPG, a memorise symbol is placed behind the title
of the programme
.
After a software update, it is likely that Memos of
programmes are deleted. After a software update,
please check your timer list
(see chapter Recordings,
section Timer).
Adapting the EPG view
EPG called.
PIP: Switch in EPG view between standard and
compact view.
Standard view:
Compact view:
Configuring EPG
You can find the EPG settings in the chapter System settings,section
Control – EPG).
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
39
TV
Teletext
Teletext
Your TV set supports the two operating systems TOP text and FLOF.
Up to 2000 pages are stored in order to get quick access.
Starting and ending Teletext
TEXT: Call teletext.
The function of the TEXT key can be set under
System settings ט Control טmore ...טHbbTVט
Function of the TEXT key.
The factory default is Standard teletext first (see
also chapter System settings, section Control –
HbbTV).
TEXT: Switching between Standard Teletext and
MediaText.
If no MediaText is available Teletext off.
Otherwise:
Pressing the BACK key ends Teletext.
Key functions for Standard Teletext operation
INFO press longer: Show Explanation of keys.
IINFO or BACK: Hide Explanation of keys.
0-9: Directly enter the page number.
0: Stop self changing pages.
9: Zoom in the page (press several times).
Page selection with the coloured keys
Red key: One page back or back to previous page
(depending on Teletext provider).
Green key: Advance one page.
Yellow key: To next topic.
Blue key: To next range of topics.
The coloured bars (with TOP text) or the coloured
writing (with FLOF text) in the last to bottom line show
you which colour button you need to use to select which
topic areas and topics.
Page selection with P+/P–
P+ call next Teletext page.
P– call previous Teletext page.
Additional page selection possibilities
First possibility:
INFO: Call overview page 100.
Second possibility:
Directly enter the page number.
Third possibility:
The page includes 3-digit page numbers.
Mark desired page number.
OK Call page.
Fourth possibility:
The page consists of several sub-pages, indicated by
the symbol
and the arrows in the bottom line.
 Go to bottom line.
 Mark
or ,
OK select previous / next sub-page.
The number of the current sub-page is shown
between the arrows.
Explanation of the symbols in the Teletext bottom line
Symbol
(icon)
Remote
control key
Description
For Teletext pages with sub-pages:
Show previous sub-page.
For Teletext pages with sub-pages:
Show next sub-page.
Hide TV picture (Teletext as full screen).
Insert TV picture (Split screen Teletext/
TV Picture).
Activate Newsflash mode.
Show hidden information on the Teletext
page.
Hide information on the Teletext
page again.
Add current Teletext page to the favourites
in Home view.
Call function list with Teletext settings.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
40
TV
Teletext / Rotating the TV set
Newsflash
Some text pages, e.g., live tickers, will be permanently updated. In
order to keep track of changes and also to be able to watch the TV
programme at the same time you may hide the Teletext temporarily
and can still remain informed on updates of the page.
 Mark
Newsflash,
OK confirm.
The future behaviour of the News function depends
on the type of the Teletext page:
In case of Full screen Teletext pages the Teletext will
be hidden. In the bottom right corner, there will be a
symbol for the activated news function.
A screen message appears when the contents of the
page has changed.
Show updated page,
 Select yes or no.
OK Confirm selection.
In case of Teletext pages which cover only a part of the
Teletext page, e.g., News tickers, the respective part
will be faded in and permanently updated.
End News function
OK show Teletext again.
Or:
BACK: exit Teletext.
The Teletext page has
been updated. Would
you like to see it now?
yes no
Rotating the TV set
By using a connected motorized stand you have the possibility to rotate
your TV set by means of the remote control.
The range of rotation and the switch-off position you can set under
System Settings ט Control ט more ... ט Rotate TV. For more
information, see chapter System Settings, section Control –
Rotate TV.
Menu item will only be displayed when a motorised stand is con-
nected to the TV set.
Rotating the TV set
In normal TV mode, without other displays:
Rotate TV set to the desired position.
Or:
MENU: Call function list.
 Select Rotate TV,
OK call.
Rotate TV set to the desired position.
The TV set may be positioned within the set
range of rotation.
BACK: exit Rotate TV.
1
-40°
+40°-11°
Rotate TV
Rotate TV
Back
Rotation angle
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
41
(1
Depending on the settings selected.
TV
HbbTV / MediaText
HbbTV / MediaText
HbbTV
(1
(Hybrid broadcast broadband television) offers the user
comprehensive multimedia contents, e.g., media centres or additional
information on the current programme as far as they are provided by
the station (Value-added service).
MediaText helps you to use the next generation of teletext/videotext
for HbbTV.
MediaText/HbbTV text can either be started directly or through an
HbbTV application.
Dependent on the selected TV station, buttons on your remote
control can be locked via MediaText / HbbTV text.
The TV must be connected to the Internet to use HbbTV/MediaText.
A connection speed of at least 6,000 kbit/s (DSL 6000 or
equivalent) is recommended for smooth playback of videos.
Opening an HbbTV application
If an HbbTV application is available for the chosen channel after
changing channels, this will be loaded during the automatic start
process and a red key symbol will appear. When starting manually,
the application will be loaded not until you press the red key. The start
behaviour can be set under System settings ט Control ט more...ט
HbbTVטFunction of the TEXT key.
HbbTV is offered by the selected channel.
Connection to the Internet established.
HbbTV mode is set to on.
Red key: Load / display HbbTV application.
The appearance, key assignment and available
functions of the HbbTV applications are dependent on
the provider.
Under certain circumstances, the recording and
bookmarking functions of the applications may not be
supported.
Loewe do not guarantee the accessibility, functionality
or content of HbbTV applications.
Hide / Close HbbTV application
BACK: Hide / Close HbbTV application.
Depending on the set start behaviour, the HbbTV
application will be hidden (automatically) or closed
(manually). In the start behaviour Automatic, you
need to press the BACK key a second time for closure.
You will see a screen message after closing.
Opening HbbTV text directly
Depending on the programme provider, the direct
Call of MediaText may not be possible. MediaText
must then be opened by means of the HbbTV
application.
MediaText/HbbTV text is offered by the selected
channel.
Connection to the Internet established.
TEXT: Call up “standard” Teletext (see chapter TV,
section Teletext).
By pressing the TEXT key a second time the Media-
Text/HbbTV Text will be called up.
The function of the TEXT key can be set.
Navigation within the HbbTV Text and how the coloured
keys are assigned can vary depending on the provider.
Terminating the HbbTV Text
Pressing the BACK key ends HbbTV text.
HbbTV services for DVB radio
Various DVB radio stations also offer HbbTV text/media text. The
functionality is the same as in TV mode.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
42
TV
PIP
Picture in Picture (PIP)
The concurrent display of two different images is referred to as Picture
in Picture.
Starting and ending PIP mode
PIP: Show/hide PIP display.
Simultaneous display of...
z (yes) / – (no)
a digitally broadcast channel (DVB-T/C/S) and
picture from a digital AV source (e.g. HDMI1)
z
a channel via digital satellite (DVB-S) and a
channel via analogue cable television
a digitally broadcast channel DVB-T/C and a
channel over analogue cable television
a digitally broadcast channel over DVB-T/C and
a satellite broadcaster (DVB-S)
z
two channels over analogue cable television
two digitally broadcast channels (DVB-T/C/S)
z
a free-to-air and an encrypted digitally broad-
cast channel (DVB-T/C/S)
z
two encrypted channels
z
an SDTV channel and an HDTV channel (DVB-
C/S)
z
two HDTV channels (DVB-C/S)
z
Picture change and station selection are restricted during recording.
In PIP mode, it is generally not possible to use analogue stations and
analogue sources (AV, PC IN etc.) for main/PIP picture.
Selecting the station of the PIP picture
If the frame colour of the PIP picture is not green,
press the green key.
Select the station as usual. (see also chapter TV,
section Select station or chapter Sources).
Select the station for the main picture
If the frame colour of the PIP picture is not white,
press the green key.
Select the station as usual. (see also chapter TV,
section Select station or chapter Sources).
Coloured key functions
If the frame colour of the PIP picture is not green,
press the green key.
Yellow key: Swaps contents of TV picture and PIP
picture.
Blue key: Start/stop PIP scan in the PIP picture.
Change PIP position
PIP image is displayed.
 Move PIP image to one of the screen corners.
PIP Settings
The size of the PIP display can be set in the System settings under
Controlטmore ...טPIP (see also chapter System settings, section
Control – PIP).
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
43
Recordings
Digital Recorder
TV viewing with time shift
You can record programmes on the integrated hard disk
(1
of your TV
set with the digital recorder of your Loewe TV set.
The TV broadcast that you watch is automatically recorded in the
background. You can stop the TV programme at any time and continue
watching it later with a time shift. The maximum time shift is three
hours.
During timeshift operation, the programme is not stored permanently.
If you would like to save programmes for a longer time, use the archive
recording (see next page).
Recording of analogue stations is not possible.
Time-shifted operation is perhaps not possible or only to a limited
extent for programmes of stations working with CI Plus encryption.
Interrupt watching (start timeshift television)
Press PAUSE key.
The TV image becomes a freeze frame and the DR+
status display appears.
At the top you will see the number and name of
the station, start, end and the title of the current
programme.
In the lower part of the screen at the beginning of the
time bar you find the starting time of the background
recording. On the right hand side of the bar you can
see the time at which the time shift recorder will be
full (automatically extends by 30 minutes, up to a
max. 3 hours).
The time above the bar at the PAUSE key shows the
current time.
Continue (time shift viewing)
Press PLAY key.
You can now continue watching the TV programme
at the time when you had pressed the PAUSE key.
The Playback symbol appears instead of the Pause
symbol.
For further options of time-shift watching see chapter
Sources, section Video playback.
Returning to live picture (end timeshift television)
Press STOP key.
You see the station’s live picture again.
Switch to a different station
If you switch the channel, the current time-delayed recording is dis-
carded (time shift buffer is emptied).
The timeshift recording is automatically started on TV sets with an
internally installed hard disk.
The timeshift recording must be manually started on TV sets with an
external USB hard disk connected.
When switching between encrypted and unencrypted contents of the
same station the timeshift buffer is also cleared.
When doing this, the timeshift television is interrupted and you see
the live picture of the broadcast.
As a precaution, start archive recording of interesting broadcasts when
watching stations with changing coding.
Setting bookmarks
You can manually set bookmarks during time-shift TV watching. For
this, the time shift recording is converted into an archive recording.
(1
For device type bild 4 with external USB hard disk
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
44
Recordings
Digital Recorder
Archive recording
Programmes that you wish to watch at a later date can be recorded in
the Digital Recorder Archive (DR+ archive).
(1
A recording can be made manually (instant recording / direct
recording) or as timer recording. The timer data can again be entered
manually or more comfortably, for example, via EPG.
If EPG or teletext data is available, the Digital Recorder stores the title
and additional information on each programme in the archive.
If additional languages are being transmitted for a DVB broadcast,
these will also be recorded. DVB subtitles can also be recorded.
You can watch another programme or playback a recorded TV
programme from the archive while recording a TV programme into
the archive. But you can also play back the programme that you are
just recording with time-shift.
With multi recording two programmes can be recorded simultaneously
(see chapter Recordings, secion Digital Recorder – Multi
recording).
During the archive recording, the bar showing the recording progress
is red.
Recording of analogue stations is not possible.
Recordings of CI Plus encrypted programmes (e.g. RTL HD, Sat 1
HD, Pro 7 HD, etc.) are perhaps not possible or only to a limited
extent.
In order to use the full DR+ functionality, two antenna cables must
be connected when using DVB-S.
Instant recording (One touch recording) / Direct recording
With One Touch Recording, the recording starts immediately at the
press of a button.
The timer data is retrieved during the direct recording. If required, it
can be adapted and the recording subsequently started.
If the broadcast was watched right from its start, it will be saved from
the the beginning in the DR+ archive. Otherwise, recording begins
at the point from which viewing of the broadcast began.
One Touch Recording
Press REC key longer: The current programme is
recorded immediately.
Direct recording:
Press REC key briefly.
If desired, adjust timer data (e.g. directory, start, end,
recording type).
 Select Record station,
OK adopt.
Watching other stations during archive recording
After you have started the recording, you can switch to another station.
The second channel can be watched in time-shift TV whilst a
recording is taking place (Time shift during archive recording).
Viewing another programme from the archive during archive
recording
After you have started the recording, you can also watch a programme
you have already recorded.
Open the DR+ archive.
Mark the recorded programme,
OK view programme.
The recording process is continued in the background.
Time shift viewing during archive recording
Whilst an archive recording is taking place you can play back the
programme that is being recorded or watch a programme on another
channel using time delay.
PAUSE key: Switch to freeze picture.
The recording is continued in the background.
Display during time-shift viewing and archive recording:
PLAY key: Continue playback.
You will now see the time-shift archive recording.
For further options of time-shift watching see chapter
Sources, section Video playback.
STOP key: End time shift and return to the live picture
of the current archive recording.
Subsequent archive recording
You can also save an already viewed and finished broadcast in the
archive provided there has been no change of station in between.
Skip or wind back to the desired broadcast and start the recording.
Setting bookmarks during archive recording
During a running archive recording you can create bookmarks (by press-
ing the PLAY key a little longer). You will see a message on the screen.
Bookmarks also serve as starting and end points of intervals.
(1
For device type bild 4 with external USB hard disk
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
45
Recordings
Digital Recorder
Subtitles
Subtitles of a broadcast can also be stored during recording.
The recording of subtitles in DR+ continuous mode must be
activated in the settings.
Calling up the subtitles during a later playback is similar to calling
subtitles in TV mode.
Timer-controlled recording
Comfortably select your favourite programme for recording from the
EPG. The timer overview has room for 50 entries.
You will find further information on timer-recording in chapter
Recordings, section Timer.
Switching off the TV set during recording
You can switch off the TV to standby whilst recording. The recording
is continued in the standby mode.
Never switch the TV set off at the mains and do not pull the plug
of the TV set out of the socket. Otherwise the recording will be lost!
Stop recording early
You can end a current archive recording prematurely.
Press STOP key.
A message appears in the right upper corner of the
screen.
OK Stop recording.
The recording process is ended. The portion of the TV
broadcast recorded up to this point is saved on the
hard disk and can be played back via the DR+ archive.
If two archive recordings are active (multi recording),
the recording stops that started first.
You can also end a running recording by deleting the
corresponding Timer entry in the Timer overview
(see chapter Recordings, section Timer).
Multi recording
The Multi Recording function makes it possible to record two pro-
grammes at the same time and still watch a third one as well.
Generally speaking: each recording, each selected station requires
one transponder stream. With dual channel devices, two separate
streams are available.
An ideal scenario is to record from two stations sharing one tran-
sponder, so that any third programme can be watched.
While simultaneously recording from two programmes that are on two
different transponders, only those stations are selectable for the third
programme, which are transmitted by one of the two transponders.
All stations that are on other transponders appear in the channel list
in dark grey and cannot be selected.
In order to use the full functionality of multi recording, two antenna
cables must be connected when using DVB-S.
Recording of analogue stations is not possible.
Recordings of CI Plus encrypted programmes (e.g. RTL HD, Sat 1
HD, Pro 7 HD, etc.) are perhaps not possible or only to a limited
extent.
The examples shown in the following table for station combinations
are valid only for DVB-S. For DVB-T or DVB-C, other combinations
may apply.
The station / recording combination that can be used, depends
on the respective station group / transponder group. You get
the assignment from your network provider or the respective
broadcasting stations.
Examples of DVB-S recording combinations:
Broadcasting station
combinations:
Possible:
Info
Recording Sat 1
Recording Pro 7
Watching any of the stations
Yes Transponder 1: Sat 1, Pro 7
Transponder 2: vacant for select-
ing any station
Recording Sat 1
Recording RTL
Watching any of the stations
No Transponder 1: Sat 1
Transponder 2: RTL
You can not choose any station,
only one station on one of the
transponders used e.g. Vox,
Pro7, RTL2.
Recording ARD HD
Recording ZDF HD
Watching arte HD
Yes Transponder 1: ARD, arte HD
Transponder 2: ZDF HD
Recording RTL
Recording RTL II
Watching ARD HD
Yes Transponder 1: RTL, RTL2
Transponder 2: ARD HD
Recording RTL
Watching ARD HD
Watching ZDF HD
No Transponder 1: RTL
Transponder 2: ARD HD
ZDF HD is on a different tran-
sponder, and therefore can not
be displayed.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
46
Recordings
Digital Recorder
DR+ archive
With the DR+ archive you have access to all the recorded programmes
and and you can start their playback. In the DR+ archive you can create
your own directories and sort your records accordingly.
Open the DR+ archive
Open DR+ archive.
If a DR+ archive is present on a connected storage
medium, this is displayed.

Select the desired DR+ archive if several available,
OK Display archive entries.
The current marked archive entry is indicated by
a white selection frame.
The archive’s name and/or storage medium, as
well as the free remaining capacity of the storage
medium are indicated in the title list.
PIP: Change DR+ Archive view between Normal View
and Concise View.
Folders are indicated in the Normal View by over-
lapping title images.
The bars under the title image show how much
of the archive entry has already been viewed.
Playing from the DR+ archive
 Select the required archive entry (programme
or directory).
If directory selected:
OK Open directory,
 Select the desired broadcast in the directory,
OK Start or continue playback of the selected
programme.
See chapter Sources, section Video playback
for further information.
During playback:
P+ call next programme.
P– call previous programme.
Directories are skipped in this case.
DR+ archive function list
The function list of the DR+ archive contains the individual function
for its archive entries.
The menu items available in the function list depend on the selected
entry from archive (programme or directory).
An archive entry has been selected.
MENU: Call function list.
 Select desired function,
OK Confirm selection.
Detailed info Show detailed information on the marked archive
entry (see next page).
Favourite Add archive entry to Home favourites.
See chapter Home view for further information.
Mulitroom
playback
If this menu item is activated, you can acces other
multiroom devices in the home network.
Rename
Changing title of the record or of directory.
Delete Delete archive entry from hard disk and recover disk
space.
Multi select Marking multiple archive entries is possible (see
next page).
Move
internal
Here, you can move recordings in the DR+ archive to
a directory and create new directories (see chapter
Recordings, section Digital Recorder – Moving
of archive entries).
Copy/move
external
Copy/move archive entries to an externally connected
USB storage device or to the hard disk of compatible
Loewe TV sets in the home network.
If no target medium is available, the menu item is
shown in dark grey.
Delete
protection
(1
Activate or deactivate protection against automatic
deletion by the Delete Manager.
Symbol for activated delete protection:
Parental
lock
Protect recorded broadcast by a four digit PIN against
unauthorised playback.
Symbol for the set parental lock:
This menu item appears only when a PIN has
already been defined (see chapter System
settings, section Control – Parental lock).
Sorting Sort archive entries according to certain criteria (e.g.
ascending A-Z or descending Z-A) or according to
recording date (newest entries first).
Change view Change DR+ Archive view between Normal View and
Concise View.
Here you can have detailed information on the selected object displayed.
i
Detailed info
Favourite
Rename
Delete
Multi select
Move internal
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
47
Recordings
Digital Recorder
Displaying detailed information on the recording
If detailed information exists on the recorded broadcast from the EPG,
you can deplay it.
The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.
INFO: Display detailed information for programme.
Or:
MENU: Call function list.
 Mark Detailed info,
OK Display detailed information on the broadcast.
On the right next to the preview image you will see, if
present, the station name, the title of the programme,
as well as a short synopsis.
Under the preview thumbnail you will see the progress
bar which indicates how much of the programme has
already been viewed.
Under the progress bar are the time and date of the
recorded programme.
Changing the title of an archive recording or folder
Desired entry (programme or folder) is highlighted
in the DR+ archive.
MENU: Call function list.
 Mark Rename,
OK Call.
 Select characters,
OK Move character to input line.
For further information on character input see chapter
General information on menu operation.
End input with Adopt. This saves the change
permanently.
Or:
BACK: Cancel renaming.
Multi select
Multiple selection allows to mark several archive entries and then
perform a desired action via the function list (e.g. export, delete).
The DR+ archive is opened, multiple selection was
called in the DR+ archive function list.
Select archive entry,
OK
Confirm selection (archive entry becomes blue).
Repeat as often as desired.
MENU: Call function list.
 Select desired function (e.g. delete),
OK
Confirm selection
.
The marked archive entries will be deleted.
Deleting recordings from the archive
The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.
STOP key: Call delete dialogue.
OK Confirm deletion.
The DR+ archive will be displayed again.
Or:
MENU: Call function list.
Mark Delete,
OK call.
OK Confirm deletion.
The DR+ archive will be displayed again.
It may take some time to delete recordings from
external hard disks, depending on the length of the
programme and recording quality.
To delete a folder, all archive entries in the folder
need to be deleted.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
48
Recordings
Digital Recorder
Export of archive entries
You can copy/move archive entries to an externally connected USB
storage device or to the hard disk of compatible Loewe TV sets in the
home network.
If no target medium is available, the menu item is
shown in dark grey.
Copying/moving recordings, which originate from
a CI Plus encrypted station, is perhaps not possible
or only to a limited extent.
The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.
MENU: Call function list.
 Mark Copy/move external,
OK call.
Select Target if several are available,
OK adopt.
Select Copy or Move.
OK Start the procedure.
After a successful moving, the recording is automati-
cally deleted from the source.
Copying to an external hard disk takes place in the
background and at a significantly higher speed. You
see a screen message, when copying has finished.
The status of copying assignments in progress/
pending can be seen in the timer list.
The TV set must not be switched off with the mains
switch during the copying process!
Moving of archive entries (folder management)
In the DR+ archive, you can create new directories when using the
function move.
Into these directories you can move existing archive entries or do a
new recording directly there.
For this purpose you simply choose the desired directory in the record-
ing control (timer data).
You can determine the name of the new directory yourself. The DR+
archive root directory has the fixed designation main directory.
It is not possible to nest several directories into one another.
With multiple selection it is possible to move several archive entries
simultaneously to a folder.
Moving an archive entry to a new folder
The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.
MENU: Call function list.
 Mark Move internal,
OK call.
 Select New folder,
OK call.
The on-screen keyboard will be displayed to enter the
folder names.
 Select character,
OK Move character to input line.
For further information on character input see
chapter General information on menu operation.
If the name of the folder is completely entered,
complete with Adopt.
The new folder is created in the DR+ archive and the
selected archive entry is moved into the folder.
Moving an archive entry into an existing folder
Archive entry to be moved to a folder is highlighted
in the DR+ archive.
MENU: Call function list.
 Mark Move internal,
OK call.
Select Target (folder name) if several are
available,
OK adopt.
Mark Execute,
OK adopt.
The selected archive entry is moved to the
selected folder.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
49
Recordings
Digital Recorder
Setting/cancelling delete protection
(1
You can provide films with a delete protection to prevent an automatic
deletion by the delete manager.
The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.
MENU: Call function list.
 Mark Delete protection,
OK Call.
 Mark yes / no,
OK Adoptsettings.
Delete manager
(1
The Delete Manager always makes sure there is enough memory space
on the hard disk for new recordings.
If the capacity on the hard disk is nearly fully exhausted, the oldest
recording(s) are automatically deleted in order to create space on
the hard disc.
Recordings which have been protected with a delete protection are
not deleted by the Delete Manager. However, you can still delete these
recordings manually.
To avoid data loss, we recommend copying important recordings to
an external USB hard disk (see Export of archive entries).
Loewe are not liable for data loss from the Digital Recorder’s hard
disk.
Locking/unlocking a movie (Parental lock)
You can lock movies that your children are not permitted to view, for
instance. Playback is then only possible after entering a PIN.
In order to activate the Parental lock, a code num-
ber (PIN) must have been defined beforehand
(see chapter System settings, section Control
– Parentol lock).
The desired entry in the DR+ archive is marked.
MENU: Call function list.
 Mark Parental lock,
OK Call.
 Select Ye s / No,
OKAdopt.
The titles of locked films in the DR+ archive will be
replaced by asterisks * when a parental lock is active
and thus cannot be read anymore. The detailed
information for the recording cannot be called up.
The cover of the recording will be replaced by a
picture of a lock. In addition, the entry will be labelled
with the symbol
.
Viewing a locked movie
The desired locked entry in the DR+ archive is
marked.
When the access code of the parental lock has not
been entered yet:
OK call entry of PIN.
Enter your PIN.
After the access code has been entered, the lock
of the archive entries will be temporarily released.
OK View film.
(1
Function not available with bild 4 oled.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
50
Recordings
Digital Recorder
DR
+
Streaming
Using the DR+ streaming function, you can view films via your home
network from the DR archives of other Loewe TVs that have been set
up for this function, as long as these units make their DR archives
accessible.
Also, you can make the DR archive of your TV set
(1
available to any
other TV sets and UPnP clients equipped with this feature. They will
then be able to access the archive via your home network.
To use DR
+
streaming, at least two Loewe TV sets are required, of
these, at least one TV set with integrated hard disk (with Chassis
SL1xx, SL2xx, SL3xx, SL4xx as DR+ Streaming Server).
The TV sets also need to be connected via a network (wireless
connection via Wi-Fi or cable connection via Ethernet, PowerLine).
Archive entries can only be provided or released in the network by
TV sets with integrated hard disks (DR
+
)
In case of these TV sets which are used as DR+ Streaming Servers,
the DR+ archive must be made available for other TV sets:
System settings ט Control ט more ... ט DR+ ט DR+ Streaming
ט Share DR+ archive with other devices ט yes.
Archive entries released in the network can be replayed by all TV
sets with chassis SL1xx, SL2xx, SL3xx, SL4xx and Chassis MB180.
In case of these TV sets used as DR+ Streaming Clients, access to
other DR+ archives must be enabled:
System Settings ט Control ט more ... ט DR+ ט DR+ Streaming
ט Also use other archives ט yes.
Functions requiring write access to a device that enables the
recording to be viewed are not available when viewing a DR+ archive
entry over the network.
Such functions are, for example, child protection, delete protection,
renaming, deleting entry or bookmark, setting bookmark, deleting
or hiding parts of the recording.
Playback of DR+ archive entry via the network
Open the DR+ archive.
 Select desired archive of the corresponding
device,
OK Display archive entries.
 Select the required archive entry,
OK Play archive entry.
See chapter Sources, section Video playback
for further information.
Follow-Me function
The Follow me function enables you to interrupt a current programme
in a TV set (main device) with integrated hard disk and to continue view-
ing it with a TV (secondary device) set from the point of interruption.
To use Follow-Me function, at least two Loewe TV sets are required,
of these, at least one TV set with integrated hard disk (with Chassis
SL1xx, SL2xx, SL3xx, SL4xx).
The TV sets also need to be connected via a network (wireless
connection via WLAN or cable connection via Ethernet, PowerLine).
On the main TV set, the function must be enabled
(1
:
System settings ט Control ט more ... ט DR+ ט DR+ Streaming
ט Share DR+ archive with other devices ט yes.
On the target TV set (secondary device), the function must be
enabled:
System Settings ט Control ט more ... ט DR+ ט DR+ Streaming
ט Also use other archives ט yes.
Start Follow-Me function on main device
Press PAUSE key.
The TV image becomes a freeze frame and the DR
status display appears.
 Activate Follow-Me
.
You will see a message on the screen.
The archive recording starts in approximately 20
seconds without an entry. The TV set switches itself
off after starting the recording. The broadcast is
adopted into the DR archive.
The recording TV set will make the broadcast available
to the network from now.
You can indicate the beginning of a Follow-Me
recording at the target TV sets in your network by
a screen display.
Continue viewing the programme at the second device
Call on the TV set, where you want to view the broadcast, the DR+
archive of the recording TV set.
Open the DR+ archive.
 Select archive of the recording TV set (main
device),
Display archive entries.
 Select Follow-Me recording,
OK View recording.
(1
For device type with integrated hard disk.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
51
Multiroom
Using the Multiroom function, you can transmit content over the net-
work from a TV (Master TV) simultaneously to up to two other Loewe
TV sets, which are in different rooms.
The content may be live TV (Multiroom TV streaming), DVB radio
(Multiroom DVB radio streaming) or DR+ recordings (Multiroom DR+
streaming
(1
).
With the wake on WLAN/LAN function the master TV set can switch
on the selected TV sets before the playback starts.
To use Multiroom TV, at least two devices with SL3xx/SL4xx chassis
must exist. For the device type Reference, the multiroom function
is available ex factory; all other types of devices must be equipped
with the feature upgrade stick SL3xx/SL4xx.
All TV sets must be connected to the home network. It is recom-
mended to use a wired connection (LAN). In case of a wireless
connection (WiFi), technical limitations (e.g. liability to interferences,
bandwidth limitations) can cause disruptions in the playback right
up to a complete breakdown of the playback.
To switch on the devices with the wake on WLAN/LAN function,
the function must be enabled. Adjustable in the System settings
under Multimedia / Network טNetwork settings טWake on
LAN/WiFi.
Multiroom playback
Select your desired content, for example, a TV or DVB radio pro-
gramme or a DR+ recording from the archive
(1
.
The TV set on which the content is selected, is for this time the Master
TV.
Example for Multiroom playback from the current TV programme:
MENU: Call function list.
 Select Multiroom playback ,
OK call.
With Multiroom TV Streaming, only stations that
transmit unencrypted TV content can be used.
 Select device(s) on which the content is to
be displayed (max. 2 devices)
OK confirm selection. Behind the selected devices, a
check mark ۪ is set.
 Select Confirm,
OK confirm selection.
The current TV programme is simultaneously
replayed on the selected
(2
devices.
The Multiroom playback of a DR+ recording from
the DR+ archive
(1
or a running DVB radio
programme follows the same pattern as described
for the above example of the Multiroom TV
streaming.
In multiroom streaming, there are limitations in
the playback controls, for example (pause and
winding are not available).
Ending the Multiroom playback
If you select a different content on an individual Multiroom TV, the
Multiroom playback on this TV set is terminated
Adapting the TV set names
The default name of your TV set in the network is Loewe bild X.XX
(X: device name ex factory, XX is the screen size).
The device name can be set in the System Settings under
Multimedia / Network ט Network settings ט Host name
.
Multiroom Bluetooth Music Player
For the functionality of the Multiroom Bluetooth Music Player, please
refer to the corresponding section (see chapter System settings,
section Multimedia/Network – Bluetooth).
Recordings
Multiroom
(1
For device type with integrated hard disk.
(2
Time delay of 100ms.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
52
Timer
In the timer menu you will find the Timer List and the Timer Services.
All programmed recordings, earmarked programmes and copy jobs
are listed in the timer list.
The timer services menu offers you convenient alarm services see
chapter Recordings, section Timer – Timer Services).
Calling the timer menu
HOME: Calling the Home view.
 Select Recordings,
 select Timer,
OK call.
Or:
press longer: call the timer menu.
Select Timer list.
Select Manual recording,
OK Timer data are retrieved (see right column).
When you have programmed timer recordings, the
TV set can only be switched off to the standby mode.
Never switch the TV set off at the mains and do
not pull out the plug of the TV set out of the socket.
Otherwise no timer recordings can be made.
When a software update occurs it may happen
that timer entries and memorised programmes
are deleted. After such a software update, check
your timer list.
Explanation of the symbols in the timer list:
Recording
Recording in progress
Marked programme
Repeated recording (daily, weekly or Mon-Fri)
Serial recording
Entering the Timer data
The setting options for the timer data differ depending on the way (EPG
or manual recording) the recording has been programmed.
 Update timer data, if required, or press
OK for confirmation.
Please also read the instructions in chapter System
settings, section Extras – CA module concerning
the recording of encoded programmes.
Explanations of the setting options in the menu Timer data –
Standard settings
Folder
If available, select the directory into which the
recording will be directly saved.
The DR+ archive root directory has the fixed
designation Main folder.
Default setting: Main folder.
Station
Station for which the recording is carried out.
Date
Day of recording.
Beginning
Starting time of the recording.
End
End time of the recording.
Recording
type
Programmes can be recorded in different ways:
Once only: The programme will be recorded at the
specified time.
Mon-Fri: The programme will always be recorded
from Monday to Friday at the specified time.
Daily: The programme will be recorded every day at
the specified time.
Weekly: The programme will be recorded every week
at the specified time.
Serial
(1
: A programme running regularly, but with dif-
ferent start times, can be conveniently programmed.
In this case, the TV set is checking ervery day at the
specified time, whether the programme is available
in the EPG data. If so, the program is recorded, if not,
the next review will be made the following day.
Recordings
Timer
(1
only available if EPG data exists.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
53
Explanations of the setting options in the menu Timer data –
Additional options
Lock
recording
Only allow later playback of this recording after
entering the PIN number (Parental lock).
If a PIN still has not been entered under System
settings ט Control ט Parental lock, the
Parental lock will at first be activated. See
chapter System settings, section Control –
Parental lock for further information.
Delete
protection
Safeguard the recording from being deleted auto-
matically by using the delete manager.
Auto time
control
(1
Your TV set can use the automatic time control
(Accurate Recording) for recording a programme.
The automatic time control takes control of the
corresponding monitoring of the start and end time
for DVB stations. The recording is started at the be-
ginning of the broadcast and switched off at the end,
even if the start and/or end time have been changed
by the programme provider.
The automatic time control is not supported by
all stations.
If yes is selected and automatic time control is
not supported by the recorded channel then no
recording is made.
If the programme information (Event-ID) should
not be available any more for the recording of a
programmed broadcast. e.g., due to a programme
change or because the Event-ID has been changed
by the station, the programme cannot be recor-
ded. The broadcasters alone are responsible for
the transfer of this data for using automatic time
control. The availability of the appropriate data
cannot be guaranteed by Loewe.
Recording
subtitles
Select whether broadcast subtitles are to be recor-
ded too.
In case of a direct recording the presetting is
taken from System settingsט Control טmore
... טDR+טRecording subtitles.
Favourite
When selecting yes the recording will be added to
the Home favourites.
Record conflict
Despite the possibility of multi recording, it can happen when
programming a new recording that there will be an overlapping with
already stored timer recordings. In this case, the recording conflict
dialogue will open.
Here you can determine which of the recordings you want to be
executed, and you must eventually specify which of the programmes
shall be fully recorded and which are cut.
 Select recording,
OK change status.
The symbol before the recording shows you what
happens to the recording.
If the status for each recording is ok:
 Mark store recordings,
OK call.
The timer data of the recordings will be adjusted
accordingly.
Explanation of the symbols in the conflict manager:
TV programme is completely recorded.
Recording is cut off (at the beginning and/or end). Pay
attention to the start and end time of the recording.
The recording is deleted.
Delete/change programmed timer instruction
Use this function in the timer list if you want to delete recordings
already programmed, to end a running timer recording or to change
a timer instruction.
The Timer list is displayed.
Mark desired timer instruction,
The text of a currently active timer instruction is
red. If you delete this timer instruction, the record-
ing is stopped.
OK Change marked timer instruction.
The timer instruction will be displayed.
Or:
STOP: Delete marked timer instruction.
OKConfirm delete.
Timer instruction will be deleted.
Recordings
Timer
(1
only available if EPG data exists.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
54
Recordings
Timer
Timer Services
This menu offers you convenient alarm services. Programmed alarms
are also active when the TV set has been switched off to standby.
If the TV set is switched on from the standby mode by alarm, a screen
message appears. If this is not confirmed within 5 minutes with the
OK key, the TV set switches automatically off again for safety reasons.
The TV set can also be switched off automatically at certain times. A
screen warning appears one minute before automatic switch off. The
automatic switch off can be interrupted by pressing any key.
Call Timer Services
HOME: Calling the Home view.
 Select Recordings,
 select Timer,
OK call.
Or:
press longer: call the timer menu.
Select Timer Services.
Select the desired setting,
OK change.
OK adopt.
Explanations of the setting options:
Sleep timer
After expiration of the indicated time, the device
automatically turns into Standby mode.
Switch off
once
The set switches to the standby mode automatically
at the specified time.
If a time is specified which has already passed on
the same day, the set switches off at this time the
next day.
Switch off
daily
The set switches to the standby mode automatically
every day at the specified time.
One time
alarm
The set alerts you once today at the specified time.
If a time was specified which has already passed on
the same day, the alarm is saved for the next day.
Wake up
Mon-Fri
The set regularly alerts you from Monday to Friday
at the set time.
Wake up Sat
Wake up Sun
The TV set alerts on Saturdays or Sundays regularly
at the specified time.
Wake up with
Indicate whether the TV set should enter the TV or
radio mode from stand-by during an alarm. The
station, which was last active, is activated.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
55
Sources
Sources
You will receive access to all devices connected to the TV set locally
via the Sources point in the Home view (e.g. to AV, HDMI, USB), as
well as all available devices on the home network in order to playback
multimedia content on the TV set.
Selecting the content source
In normal TV mode, without other displays.
Open Sources. Or:
HOME: Calling the Home view.
 Call Sources
 Select source,
OK call.
If you have selected, for example, an HDMI connection,
it will change over to the respective connection. The
TV set is ready to present the content of the source.
Where the selected source delivers a signal, this should
now be visible.
When selecting a connected USB hard disk or a media
server, you must select another playable file in the file
structure.
The structure and the presentation of the files/fold-
ers are dependent on the selected source.
 If applicable, select the desired folder,
OK then open the folder.
If required, repeat.
Select the desired file,
OK start playback of the selected file.
Possible sources
The media sources displayed depend on your devices.
HDMI
Source on HDMI connection of the TV set.
Depending on the content being played back from
the external source, see chapter Sources, section
Video-, Audio- and Photo playback.
For the connection and the configuration of external
devices, see the section External devices, section
Devices to the HDMI connections.
PC IN
Source on the AV connection (with VGA adapter)
of the TV set.
Depending on the content being played back from
the external source, see chapter Sources, section
Video-, Audio- and Photo playback.
For the connection and the configuration of external
devices, see the section External devices, section
Devices on AV.
AVS
AV
Source on the AV connection (with scart adapter)
of the TV set.
Depending on the content being played back from
the external source, see chapter Sources, section
Video-, Audio- and Photo playback.
For the connection and the configuration of external
devices, see the section External devices, section
Devices on AV.
VIDEO
Source on the ANT TV connection of the TV set.
When selecting VIDEO, you switch to the signal
source Cable analogue, channel E36. The TV set
can display the signal from an external source via
the antenna input TV ANT.
USB
Source (e.g. USB hard disk, USB stick) to an USB
connection of the TV set.
The exact description is dependent on the respective
storage medium.
Depending on the content being played back from
the external source, see chapter Sources, section
Video-, Audio- and Photo playback.
Please also refer to the chapter System settings,
section Control - Software update for the USB
sticks!
Network
Source (e.g. media server, NAS), which is available
via the Home network.
Depending on the content being played back from
the external source, see chapter Sources, section
Video-, Audio- and Photo playback.
The exact description is dependent on the respective
storage medium.
Sources function list
The sources function list contains the individual functions for your
sources.
A source has been selected.
The menu items available in the function list depend on the currently
marked object (data source, directory, file).
MENU: Call function list.
 Select desired function,
OK Confirm selection.
Sorting Sort media files in the opened directory in alphabetical
(ascending A-Z or descending Z-A) order, file size or
date (newest entries first).
Favourite Add marked media file to the Favourites in Home
view.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
56
Sources
Video
Video playback
The description of the following functions applies to the playback of
videos from the DR+ archive as well as for videos from USB storage
media or from media servers in the home network.
For playback of DR+ archive entries you have additional playback
and editing capabilities. The explanation of these functions you
find in chapter Sources, section Additional functions for DR+
archive playback.
Video status display
The video status display provides you with further options for the
current playback.
A video is being played back. Selection of the video via the menu
item Sources (see chapter Sources) or, where available, the DR+
Archive via the menu item Recordings (see chapter Recordings,
section Digital Recorder).
INFO: Show status display.
BACK: Hide the status display again.
Description of the symbols in the status display for video playback
The number of available symbols in the status display depends on
the selected video and the video source (DR+ archive, USB, home
network).
Symbol
(icon)
Remote
control key
Description
Call list view (select video).
long
Set bookmark manually.
Only for playback from DR+ archive.
long
Delete bookmark manually.
Only for playback from DR+ archive.
The function is only available when a
manually set bookmark is within five
seconds around the current playback
position.
Skip to next bookmark.
Only for playback from DR+ archive.
Skip to previous bookmark.
Only for playback from DR+ archive.
Call dialogue for deleting bookmarks.
Only for playback from DR+ archive.
Symbol
(icon)
Remote
control key
Description
Start DR+ Follow-Me recording.
The Follow-Me function enables you to
interrupt a current programme and to
continue viewing at an alternative TV
set from the point of interruption.
Only in time-shift mode.
Call interval functions.
Only for playback from DR+ archive.
Only selectable in pause mode.
Adopt current freeze picture as cover
for the DR+ archive.
Only for playback from DR+ archive.
Only selectable in pause mode.
Activate / deactivate again the rep-
etition of the currently played archive
entry.
Only for playback from DR+ archive.
Switch repetition (loop playback) of all
titles of the current directory ON/OFF.
For playback of videos from USB
storage media or from the home
network.
Switch ON/OFF repetition (loop play-
back) of the current title.
For playback of videos from USB
storage media or from the home
network.
Change picture format of the video
playback.
Skip to desired position in the playback.
Add currently played video to the fa-
vourites in Home view.
Call detailed info on the current play-
back.
INFO key: display of detailed info
when status display appears, other-
wise call of status display.
Call function list with video settings.
Explanation of keys
INFO (press longer): show Explanation of keys.
INFO or BACK: hide Explanation of keys
hh:mm
continued on the next page ט
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
57
Sources
Video
Pause playback (freeze picture)
PAUSE key: Switch to freeze picture.
PLAY key: Continue playback.
Jump
By briefly pressing the or keys you can skip forwards and back-
wards in the movie.
Skip forwards.
Skip backwards.
Skipping with Smart jump
The Smart jump function ensures that the jump width is halved each
time the jump direction is changed or doubled after three jumps in
the same direction (max. 8 minutes). This way you can quickly find a
certain spot of the recording.
You are looking for a particular scene in a running
programme:
Depending on your needs, press the key (back-
wards) or (forwards) briefly several times, to roughly
jump to the area of the programme you are looking for.
If you skipped the desired scene of the programme,
jump in the opposite direction. This jump is executed
in halfs of the jump distance.
If you skipped the desired scene of the programme
again, jump again in the opposite direction. In the
process, the jump distance is cut in half again.
By halving the jump distance again when changing
direction you can gradually approach the desired
location.
Jump by entering a time
You can jump to any position in the video by entering a time.
 Show status bar.
 mark hh:mm (Jump to ...).
Enter the desired time with the numerical keys.
OK Execute jump.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
58
Sources
Video
Wind
To search for desired scenes in movies you can fast forward and rewind
at three different speeds. Sound is not audible during winding.
or press a little bit longer.
By each brief pressing of or the speed will increase
until you switch back to the first speed.
The different winding speeds are represented by the
symbols shown below.
In case of time-shift viewing, playback is automatically
activated when the end of the recording is reached.
You are then about 10 seconds behind the live
picture or when rewinding at the beginning of the
time shift recording.
In case of Fast forward of archive entries, playback
will finish at the end of the recording. The DR+
archive is displayed again.
PLAY key: Continue playback.
In the case of Internet videos, please wait until these
are buffered in the memory. This can take a few
seconds, depending on the bit rate of the film and
Internet speed.
Repeat
Videos can be repeated, i.e., replayed in an endless loop. Depending
on the source (DR+ archive, USB storage medium, media server in
the network), single or all videos can be replayed in an endless loop.
Repeated playback of DR+ archive entries
INFO: Show status bar.
 Mark Repeat
,
OK confirm.
The current archive entry will be replayed repeatedly.
The repetition setting remains active for this archive
entry even when the playback is finished.
To deactivate playback again:
 Mark Repeat off
,
OK confirm.
Repeating videos from USB storage media or media servers
INFO: Show status bar.
 Mark Repeat title
,
OK Switch the repetition of the individual video ON/
OFF.
The repeat setting remains until it will be deacti-
vated or another video is replayed.
Or:
 Mark Repeat all
,
OK Switch repetition of all titles of the current
directory ON/OFF.
The repeat setting remains until it will be deactivated
or another directory in the overview is selected.
Repeat title and Repeat all cannot be activated
simultaneously. Using one of the two functions
deactivates the respective other one.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
59
Sources
Video
Select language/sound
Videos, especially those recorded from TV broadcasts, can contain
several sound tracks.
Select sound track/language:
INFO: Show status bar.
 Mark Settings
,
OK Call settings.
 Mark Language/sound,
OK call Language/Sound selection.
 mark desired sound or desired language,
OK select sound track.
Changing the picture format
Function is not available for all videos.
INFO: Show status bar.
 Mark Change Picture format
,
OK set picture format.
You can choose between small or full image settings.
Small image setting shows the video close to the
original resolution. The video status bar is permanently
shown below the image.
The full image setting enlarges the image to fit the
entire screen. The status bar can be set to visible or
hidden.
Additional functions for DR+ archive playback
There are additional editing and playback functions for playback of
recorded programmes from the DR+ archive.
Setting bookmarks
To retrieve interesting scenes in a movie later, you can manually set the
bookmarks. In addition, there are also automatically set bookmarks
for the start/end of a programme.
In programmes sent in Dolby Digital 5.1 format, the commercials are
detected and automatically bookmarked at the beginning and end of
the advertising block.
In case of a running time-shift recording (timeshift television), this will
be converted into an archive recording when a blank is set.
PLAY key (press longer): Set bookmark.
You will see a message on the screen. The status bar is
then faded in and you will see the set bookmark above
the bar for the playback.
Automatically set bookmarks are grey. Manually set
bookmarks are blue.
Jumping to Bookmarks
INFO: Show status bar.
 Mark next bookmark
,
OK Jump to next bookmark.
 Mark previous bookmark
,
OK Jump to next bookmark.
Or:
Blue key: Skip to next bookmark.
Yellow key: Skip to previous bookmark.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
60
Sources
Video
Deleting individual bookmarks
Jump to the manually set bookmark to be deleted.
Press PLAY key for a little bit longer: Delete bookmark.
Deleting the Bookmark during playback
You can delete your manually set bookmarks during the playback of
the DR+ Archive entry.
Manually set bookmarks are blue, automatically set bookmarks are
displayed in grey. Automatically set bookmarks cannot be deleted.
PAUSE key: Switch to freeze picture.
 Mark Delete bookmark
,
OK call delete dialogue.
Delete all
bookmarks
All manually set bookmarks (blue) in the current
recording are deleted.
Delete
bookmark
The manually set bookmark to the left of the current
position will be deleted.
Delete
bookmark
The manually set bookmark to the right of the current
position will be deleted.
OKConfirm selection.
PLAY key: Continue playback.
Interval functions
The intervals between manually or automatically set bookmarks
(intervals) can be faded out for future playbacks.
In addition to that, unwanted intervals at the beginning or end of your
recorded broadcast can be deleted.
An archive entry is replayed.
INFO: Show status bar.
Move to the desired interval in the recorded broadcast
by skipping or winding.
PAUSE: Stop play.
 Mark Interval functions
,
OK Call interval functions.
Hiding intervals
The Interval functions are activated.
mark Hide,
OK hide current interval.
This interval will be skipped when the archive entry is
replayed in the future.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
61
Sources
Video
Show hidden sections
A screen message will appear when a hidden section is skipped during
replay of a DR+ archive entry.
In
System settings ט Control טmore ...טDR+
טNotify hidden sections ט yes must be selected
.
 When message appears on screen, select yes,
OK confirm.
During future replays, the hidden section is displayed
again.
Deleting part of the recording
An archive entry is replayed.
INFO: Show status bar.
Press PAUSE key at such a position from which the
recording shall be deleted up to the beginning or to
the end.
 Mark Interval functions
,
OK Call interval functions.
 Mark Delete to start or Delete to end,
OK confirm.
 Mark Confirm delete
OK Delete part of recording.
Deleting intervals
Defined intervals will be deleted when you delete the corresponding
bookmark at the beginning or the end of the interval.
Determine cover picture
The covers for the display of the entry in the DR+ archive can be freely
determined by you during an archive replay:
Jump / wind to the desired position in the recording.
PAUSE key: Switch to freeze picture.
 Mark Adopt as cover picture
,
OK confirm.
You will see a message on the screen. The image will
be displayed next to the broadcast in the DR archive
in future.
PLAY key: Resume play.
Subtitles
When recording a programme, any existing subtitles can be recorded
as well and displayed when playing back.
An archive entry is replayed.
Subtitles were recorded too (see chapter TV, section
Recordings – Entering the Timer data).
INFO: Show status bar.
 Mark Settings
,
OK call settings.
 Mark Subtitles,
OK call up available subtitles.
 Mark the desired subtitles,
OK show/hide subtitles.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
62
Sources
Audio
Audio playback
Description of the symbols in the status display for audio
playback
An audio file is being played back. Selection of the audio file via the
menu item Sources (see chapter Sources).
Symbol Remote
control key
Description
Call list view (select music title / station).
Switch repetition (loop playback) of all
titles of the current directory ON/OFF.
Only for playback of music titles via
USB / Home network.
Switch ON/OFF repetition (loop play-
back) of the current title.
Only for playback of music titles via
USB / Home network.
Switch shuffle playback for the titles of
the current directory ON/OFF.
Only for playback of music titles via
USB / Home network.
Switch off the TV screen.
Add the current station / music title to
the favourites in Home view.
Show EPG detailed info on the current
broadcast.
Only for DVB radio.
Call detailed info on the played music
titles.
Only for playback of music titles via
USB / Home network.
Call function list with audio settings.
Explanation of keys
INFO (press longer): show Explanation of keys.
INFO or BACK: hide Explanation of keys.
Pause playback
PAUSE key: Stop current playback.
PLAY key: Continue playback.
Wind
You can fast forward music titles at four different speeds. Sound is not
audible during winding.
Press a little bit longer.
With each brief pressing of the speed will increase
until you switch back to the first speed.
Available speeds: 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x.
PLAY key: Continue playback.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
63
Sources
Audio
Select another title / play current title from start
BACK: Call music selection.
Select Music Titles as described in the chapter Sources.
Or:
Press P+ or briefly:
Play next title of current album / directory.
Press P– or briefly:
Play current title from start.
Press P– or briefly again:
Play previous title of the current album / directory.
Or:
 Go to line with music titles,
 scroll in music titles.
OK Start playback of the marked title.
Repeat
Music titles can be repeated, i.e., replayed in an endless loop.
 Mark Repeat title
,
OK Switch the repetition of the individual music title
ON/OFF.
The repeat setting remains until it will be deactivated
or another music title is replayed.
Or:
 Mark Repeat all ,
OK Switch repetition of all music titles of the current
directory ON/OFF.
The repeat setting remains until it will be deactivated
or another directory in the overview is selected.
Repeat title and Repeat all cannot be activated
simultaneously. Using one of the two functions
deactivates the respective other one.
Repeat and Shuffle (see right column) cannot be
activated at the same time. Activating a repeat
operation deactivates shuffle.
Shuffle playback
The music titles of your current medium are replayed in random order.
 Mark Shuffle playback
,
OK Switch shuffle playback of the titles in current
album / directory ON/OFF.
Repeat and Shuffle (see left column) cannot be
activated at the same time. Activating the shuffle
playback deactivates repeat.
Switching the screen ON/OFF
Green key: Switch screen OFF.
Or:
 Mark Screen off
,
OK Switch screen off.
Switching off the screen reduces the power
consumption of the TV set.
Switch on the screen with the remote control:
Press green key.
Ending playback
STOP key: End playback and return to music selec-
tion.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
64
Sources
Photo
Photo playback
Description of the symbols in the status display for photos
A photo is being displayed. Selection of the photo via the menu item
Sources (see chapter Sources).
Symbol
(icon)
Remote
control key
Description
Call Folder view (select photo).
Rotate photo by 90 degrees to the left.
(Rotate left)
Rotate photo by 90 degrees to the right.
(Rotate right)
Start slide show.
Pause slide show.
short
Show previous photo.
short
Show next photo.
Add currently displayed photo to the
favourites in Home view.
Call detailed info on the displayed photo.
Call function list with photo settings.
Explanation of keys
INFO (press longer): show Explanation of keys.
INFO or BACK: hide Explanation of keys.
Full-screen mode
A photo is highlighted in the selection (Folder view).
OK View photo in full-screen mode.
Show previous / next photo.
Rotating the photo
 Fade in photo status.
 Mark
or .
OK Rotate photo by 90 degrees to the left/right.
Slide show
PLAY key: Start slide show.
PAUSE key: Pause slide show.
PLAY key: Continue paused slide show.
Photo in full-screen mode / exit slide show
STOP key: Full-screen mode / end slide show and
return to photo selection.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
65
Apps
Here you have access to multimedia content in the Internet (App Gallery)
as well as a high-quality web browser.
Calling the Web selection
HOME: Calling the Home view.
 Select Apps.
 Select favourite (if any) or source,
OK call.
Possible Web sources
App Gallery
Under the menu item App Gallery you will find a
continually expanding platform for interactive TV
applications from the Internet (see next column).
All applications are optimised for use on the TV.
Browser
Call Web browser of the TV set.
For further information see chapter Apps, section
Browser.
DVB radio
The TV set can receive digital radio stations via DVB.
For more information, see chapter Apps, section
DVB radio.
Internet radio
The TV can receive digital radio stations over In-
ternet.
For more information, see chapter Apps, section
Internet radio.
App Gallery
Call App Gallery
To use the full functionality of App Gallery, the TV
set must be connected to the Internet.
HOME: Call Home view.
 Select Apps.
 Select App Gallery,
OK call.
T
he upper portion of the App Gallery home screen
contains new online content.
The lower portion of the App Gallery home screen
contains Recommendations given by Loewe.
The given content may change from time to time
without prior notice.
 Select Home,
OK go to the right to choose the online content.
 Mark the desired online content,
OK Display/play content.
The navigation within the various applications
depends on the provider.
Functions in the App Gallery home screen
Home
Displays the App Gallery home screen with a choice of
new online content and recommendations.
Browse
Under Browse you can list and call the online content
by subjects.
Settings In the Settings for App Gallery you can select
countries, for example, to take advantage of various
services.
Imprint Providing the legally required information on the
parties responsible for the content.
Exit App Gallery
HOME: Call Home view and select another function.
App Galerie - Home
Apps
App Gallery
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
66
Apps
App Gallery
App Gallery – Browse
Under the item Browse, you browse the full range of applications by
topic.
App Gallery-Browse is called.
Filtering applications
 Select the genre / topic,
OK call applications of the genre.
 Select desired application,
OK open application
Change filter
 Go to column with genres / topics.
Select another genre / topic,
OK call applications of the selected genre.
Exit Browse
BACK: Return to the App Gallery home screen.
Or:
 Go to column with genres / topics.
 Select Back,
OK return to the App Gallery home screen.
All
MediaNet - Browse
All
Recommendations
Video
Photo
Service
Games
Entertainment
News
B
ac
k
Games
MediaNet - Browse
Games
Entertainment
News
Sport
Music
S
erv
i
ce
Define application as favourite
 Mark the desired application.
Add the marked application to the Home favourites.
The favourite is added to view Home of web favourites
and queued at the end.
App Gallery – Settings
Here, you can find setting options for App Gallery.
App Gallery settings are called.
 Select the desired setting,
OK call.
Country
Selection
Select countries from which you want to get
information on services (see below).
Imprint
Providing the legally required information on the
parties responsible for the content.
Country Selection
 Mark country,
OK select / deselect country.
Various services (applications, etc.) from countries
that are marked with a tick
are offered in App
Gallery.
Exit Settings
BACK: Return to the App Gallery home screen.
Or:
Go to column with settings.
 Select Back,
OK return to the App Gallery home screen.
MediaNet - Country Selection
Select Countries to display various services
Country Selection
Imprint
ac
Germany Netherland Hungary
Austria Luxemburg Norway
Switzerland UK Poland
France Denmark Russia
Italy Sweden Slovakia
Spain Finland Turkey
Portugal Australia
Belgium Czech Republic
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
67
Apps
Browser
Browser
You can access Internet sites directly using the integrated Opera
browser. The web browser can also be used without an Internet
connection. Thus you can access local devices which provide a web
interface (e.g., router, home control, home network server).
Calling the Web browser
HOME: Calling the Home view.
 Select Apps,
 Select Browser,
OK call.
Start page will be opened.
INFO: display browser status.
Explanation of the symbols in the browser status
Update the displayed Internet site. (Reload site)
Select as start page.
100% Change zoom factor of the displayed site / browser.
Add displayed Web site as favourite to Home screen.
Navigation on Web sites
P+/P– Scroll page vertically.
/ Scroll page horizontally.
 Select link or text entry field with white
mouse cursor faded in,
OK open link or confirm text input.
For the entry of text, press a numerical key (0-9)
repeatedly as with a mobile phone until the desired
character appears. The available letters are printed on
the individual numerical keys.
Yellow key: Delete character.
BACK: Stop text entry and exit entry box.
Entering a URL (Internet address)
Browser status is displayed.
 Mark the URL (Internet address) of the
indicated Internet site,
OK Open address entry box.
 Select required character,
OK Accept character.
In the event of letters with a triangular, additional
letters are displayed when pressing the OK button
longer (2 sec).
Å
Delete character to the left of the cursor.
.-/
The selection switches to special characters.
abc
Switch between upper/lower case.
Space
Enter blank space.
Delete Delete all characters.
Cancel
Cancel input. The entry box will be closed and the
previous Internet site will be displayed again.
Accept
Accept address and open new Internet site.
The characters may also be entered by the USB
keyboard or the numerical keys of the remote control
(see left column).
Exit Browser
Web site is displayed. Browser status is hidden
HOME: Call Home view and select another function.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
68
Apps
DVB radio
DVB radio
The TV set can receive digital radio stations via DVB.
The AUDIO key has been preset to radio mode in the factory.
Switching Radio mode on
AUDIO key on the remote control.
The last used radio mode (DVB or Internet) is called.
Or:
HOME: Calling the Home view.
 Select Apps.
 Select DVB radio,
OK call.
For the first use of DVB-Radio the first station in the
radio station list is called, otherwise the station last
used.
Certain radio stations show instead of the above
symbol, a station logo.
Station switching
The radio mode is switched on and a radio station
has been selected (see above).
P+/P– Station up/down.
The number and the station name are displayed
briefly. Also, the status display with time/date and
programme-dependent symbols appears.
Or:
Enter the station directly using the numerical keys.
Or:
OK call station list.
Select station,
OK call.
2 ANTENNE BAYERN
Explanation of keys
INFO (press longer): show Explanation of keys.
INFO or BACK: hide Explanation of keys.
DVB radio function list
MENU: Call function list.
Or:
OK Call station list,
call function list.
 Select function,
OK call.
See chapter TV, section Function list for further
information.
HbbTV services for DVB radio
Various DVB radio stations also offer HbbTV text/media text. The
functionality is the same as in TV mode. (see chapter TV, section
HbbTV / MediaText).
Switching the screen on/off
Green key: Switch screen OFF.
Switching off the screen reduces the power
consumption of the TV set.
Switch on the screen with the remote control:
Press green key.
Exit radio mode
Press AUDIO key or
TV key: TV mode is called.
Or:
HOME: Calling the Home view.
 Select another operating mode,
OK call.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
69
Apps
Internet radio
Internet radio
The TV set can receive digital radio stations via the Internet.
The names of the directories and stations in the Internet radio mode
are given by the provider vTuner. Changing the order of stations or
renaming them is not possible here.
Internet radio is only accessible if a connection to the Internet has
been established.
Switching Radio mode on
AUDIO key on the remote control.
The last used radio mode (DVB or Internet) is called.
Or:
HOME: Calling the Home view.
 Select Apps.
 Select Internet radio,
OK call.
You see the radio station list.
 Mark desired directory,
OK open directory. Repeat procedure if necessary.
Select station,
OK call.
For further information on the control of the In-
ternet radio see chapter Sources, section Audio
playback.
Station switching
BACK: call station list.
Select stations as described above. Or:
P+/P– Scroll through the current Internet radio
directory to look for stations. Or:
Keys 2-9: Input the first letter. The station list will jump
to the first station of the corresponding letter.
Explanation of keys
INFO (press longer): show Explanation of keys.
INFO or BACK: hide Explanation of keys.
Internet radio function list
MENU: Call function list.
 Select function,
OK call.
See chapter TV, section Function list for further
information.
Artist Search (Search for artists)
By means of the search for artists, you can quickly and easily see all
radio stations that just play music by this artist. The result list is sorted
for now and most played.
Internet radio station list is opened.
 Select search for artists,
OK on-screen keyboard is opened.
 Enter name of the band or singer using the
keyboard (see also chapter General
information on the operation, section
Entering characters with on-screen
keyboard),
OK adopt, search is started.
 Select station,
OK call.
Station search
You can search an Internet radio station directly by name using the
menu item Station search. The procedure is similar to the Artist Search
described above.
Switching the screen on/off
Green key: Switch screen OFF.
Or:
 Select Screen off
,
OK Switch screen off.
Switching off the screen reduces the power
consumption of the TV set.
Switch on the screen with the remote control:
Press green key.
Exit radio mode
TV key: TV mode is called.
Or:
HOME: Calling the Home view.
 Select another operating mode,
OK call.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
70
System settings
System settings
Under the menu item System settings in the Home menu you
find all settings and adaptabilities of your TV set.
Calling System settings
HOME: Call Home view.
 Select System settings ,
OK call.
Or:
Press MENU key longer: call System settings.
Explanations of the setting options:
Picture
Here you do the settings referring to the
representation of the picture signal on your TV set.
Menu items Picture:
Picture adjustment, Contrast, Brightness, Color
intensity, Image+ Active, Picture format, Automatic
aspect ratio.
Menu items Picture טmore ...:
Colour temperature, Sharpness, Move picture up/
down, Auto dimming, Film quality improvement
(DMM), Digital Noise Control (DNC), Skin tone,
Gamma brightness correction,OLED Calibration,
Deblocking filter.
For more information refer to chapter System
settings, section Picture.
Sound
Under this menu item you find the settings for sound
playback.
Menu items Sound:
Sound mode, Sound adjustment, Loudness,
Surround Mode, Sound picture synchronisation,
Volume adjustment.
Menu items Sound טmore ...:
Auto volume, AV output signal, Maximum volume,
Maximum switch on volume, Balance.
The available menu items may vary and depend
on the connected audio component.
For more information refer to chapter System
settings, section Sound.
Stations
Move and delete TV and radio stations. In addition
to that you can automatically and manually update
the complete station list. Your stations can also be
arranged and optionally sorted in personal lists.
Menu items Stations:
Automatic scan TV+Radio, Manuell scan (incl.
antenna status), Station lists TV, Station lists Radio,
Update station list automatically, Transfer all station
lists.
For more information refer to chapter System
settings, section Stations.
Control
In this menu you find settings for additional functions
of your TV set like EPG, picture in picture (PIP), digital
recorder (DR+) as well as interfunctional settings
like time and date, parental lock or software update.
Menu items Control:
Language, Parental lock, EPG, Energy efficiency,
Quick start mode, Software update.
Menu items Control טmore ...:
On-screen displays, Time and date, DVB settings,
PIP, DR+, Standard Teletext, HbbTV, Hard disks,
Export log file, WEB key function.
For more information refer to chapter System
settings, section Control.
Multimedia /
Network
By means of the Multimedia / Network menu you
configure your network adaptor and network access.
By means of the menu item renderer you can allow
external devices to access your TV set (renderer) via
app to render (play back) contents there.
Menu items Multimedia / Network:
Network settings, Multimedia settings, Home
Automation, Renderer, Mobile Recording, Bluetooth,
TIDAL login.
For more information refer to chapter System
settings, section Multimedia / Network.
Connections
Use this menu to configure the TV set for operation
with external devices.
The sound component wizard leads you comfortably
through the configuration of your used audio
equipment such as speaker systems or HiFi/AV
amplifiers.
For more information, refer to the instruction
manuals of the equipment used.
Menu items Connections:
Sound components, Antenna DVB, AV connecting
settings, Digital Link, HDMI.
For more information refer to chapter System
settings, section Connections.
Extras Under this menu item you can display the features
of your TV set, repeat the initial startup or reset the
device to the factory settings.
Also, DR+ streaming can be enabled, by means of
which the TV set provides the contents of the DR+
archive on the network.
Menu items Extras:
DR+ Streaming, Integrated features, Repeat initial
installation, Reset to factory settings.
For more information refer to chapter System
settings, section Extras.
(1
For device type with integrated hard disk.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
71
System settings
Picture
Picture
Here you do the settings referring to the representation of the picture
signal on your TV set.
Calling picture settings
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Picture,
go to next column.
Select desired picture function,
 proceed to next column.
Explanations of the picture settings:
Picture
adjustment
You can switch between several fixed picture
adjustment modes and the personal picture values
that you have set here.
See chapter System settings, section Picture –
Picture adjustment for further information.
Contrast
The contrast setting depends on the brightness of
the room. The brighter the surroundings the higher
the contrast should be set.
The power consumption of the TV set depends
directly on the value set here.
Brightness
Set the brightness so that the black areas of the
picture only just appear black.
Colour
intensity
Set the colour intensity to suit your personal taste.
The colours should appear natural.
You can pinpoint this by the colour of peoples‘ faces
for example.
Image
+
Active
Image+ Active is a special picture improvement
developed by LOEWE which provides a detailed and
contrasting, sharper, natural and true colored picture
which is rich in detail and contrast.
Picture
format
Select the format so that the screen is used to the
fullest possible extent without affecting the natural
proportions.
See chapter System settings, section Picture –
Selecting the picture format for further information.
Menu item is only available if
Automatic aspect
ratio
off
is selected
.
Automatic
aspect ratio
When automatic aspect ratio is switched on, the TV
set recognizes the aspect ratio for Cinemascope or
wide-screen movies and adjusts itself accordingly.
more ...
call with OK (see right-hand column).
Colour
temperature
Here, you can give the TV picture a warmer or colder
hue according to your personal taste.
Sharpness
Here you can adjust picture sharpness to obtain the
best definition.
Move picture
up/down
In various picture formats, font or graphic insertions
are not or only partially visible at the bottom or at
the top.
You can move the picture up or down with the up/
down menu control keys to make the displays visible.
Menu item only available in the picture formats
panorama or zoom.
Auto
dimming
Two automatic dimming functions are available here
which enable you to adapt the TV picture to the room
brightness, improve the visual contrast and reduce
the power consumption of your TV.
Depending on video (VBD+):
The display lighting is reduced depending on the cur-
rent video content and the video signal is simultane-
ously amplified in order to get an improved contrast
of your TV picture (Video compensated Backlight
Dimming – VBD).
Depending on the environment (OPC):
The contrast of your TV picture is automatically
reduced vs. decreasing room brightness (Optical
Power Control – OPC).
Film quality
improvement
(DMM)
DMM reduces jolt in rapid picture object movements
and rolling text displays. This applies especially for
movies.
Digital Noise
Control (DNC)
With active DNC (Digital Noise Control) you can
eliminate or reduce picture noise.
Skin tone Adjust the skin tone so that the most natural facial
skin colour is achieved.
Gamma
brightness
correction
If image seems over- or underexposed, you can
adjust it here accordingly.
OLED
calibration
Herewith you start an OLED calibration to ensure an
consistently high picture quality.
Deblocking
filter
To minimise the visible interference to the picture
caused by modern compression methods for images
and image sequences (formation of small blocks),
a so-called deblocking filter can be activated which
counteracts this interference.
PC IN
display
For some PC image formats, horizontal as well as
vertical position and the phase position of the image
can be corrected.
For more information, see chapter System set-
tings, section Picture – Selecting the picture
format.
Menu item only available if there is a valid PC signal
via the VGA adapter at the AV connection.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
72
System settings
Picture
Picture adjustment
By selecting one of the preset picture adjustment modes (Home
Mode, Premium Mode, Cinema Mode or Shop Mode), the picture
settings for the respective currently active signal input group are set
to predefined values.
You can use Personal Mode to specify individual settings for contrast,
colour intensity, colour temperature, sharpness and digital noise
suppression. Here you can enter your own specifications for each
signal input group.
You find a listing of the various signal input groups in chapter Technical
Data, section Signal input groups.
Calling picture adjustment
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Picture,
go to next column.
 Mark Picture adjustment,
go to next column.
 Select mode,
OK adopt selected mode.
When selecting one of the three preset picture
adjustment modes you have to specify additionally
if the mode shall be set only for the currently
selected signal source, e.g., Only for HD Digital or
for the entire TV.
Explanations of the picture adjustment modes:
Home Mode
The emphasis for the picture settings is here on low
energy consumption for home use. In this case, the
TV set switches automatically off after 4 hours of
unattended time.
Premium
Mode
The picture settings in Premium Mode are optimised
for a brighter environment at the cost of higher
energy consumption.
Cinema
Mode
The cinema mode is optimised for video and photo
playback.
Shop Mode
The picture settings in Shop Mode are adjusted to
operation in the presentation room.
Personal
Mode
Here, you can recall your last personal picture
settings.
Selecting the picture format
The setting options depend on the transmitted picture content.
Menu item is only available if Automatic aspect ratio – off is selected.
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Picture,
go to next column.
 Mark Picture format,
go to next column.
 Select format,
OK adopt selected format.
Explanations of the picture formats for HD signals:
4:3 TV
16:9 TV
Proportionally correct display of 4:3 or 16:9
broadcasts. You select this mode when the signal is
not supplied by a PC (normal case). A small part of
the picture is truncated. This may be necessary to
hide possible interference at the edge of the picture,
which arises from the signal supplied.
4:3 PC
16:9 PC
Proportionally correct display of 4:3 or 16:9
broadcasts without loss of information.
You select this mode when the signal is supplied
by a PC.
4:3 Zoom
16:9 Zoom
Proportionally correct display. Maximum picture
magnification. Displayed text may get lost.
Explanations of the picture formats for SD signals:
16:9 Proportionally correct display of 16:9 broadcasts.
4:3 Proportionally correct display of 4:3 broadcasts.
Panorama 1 Proportionally correct display of 4:3 broadcasts on
the 16:9 screen. Station logo and subtitles remain
visible.
Panorama 2 Format filling display (factory default) of 4:3 broad-
casts on the 16:9 screen. Station logo and subtitles
remain visible.
Zoom Proportionally correct display. Maximum picture
magnification. Displayed text may get lost.
PALplus Is a 4:3-compatible 16:9 picture broadcast supplied
by the station which is detected automatically.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
73
System settings
Sound
Sound
Calling the sound settings
The selectable menu items depend on the selected station and the
connected sound components.
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Sound,
go to next column.
Select sound function,
 proceed to next column.
Explanations of the sound settings:
Sound mode
Depending on the supplied audio signal of your TV
programme or audio source (DVD, Blu-ray, etc.)
you can select the speakers you want to listen here.
The subwoofer is always active if connected
(exception: listening mode is set to ܃).
If more audio channels are supplied than the
connected speakers are able to reproduce, the
missing speakers can be added virtually (this case
is represented respectively by brackets).
In the „optimal“ position, always the best quality
sound is output with the ideal number of speakers
for the currently played audio signal.
Optimum
܃
܃
܃
܃
܃
HiFi/AV
amplifier
The momentarily reproduced audio signal is output
with the ideal number of speakers.
Play centre sound or mono (left/right).
Play front sound (L/R stereo).
Play front and centre sound.
Play front and surround sound.
Play front, surround and centre sound.
Play via an external HiFi amplifier. Selection is only
possible if an amplifier has been selected in the
sound components wizard.
Explanations of the sound settings (continued):
Dolby PLII
mode
Here you can select/adapt preset sound
characteristics (movie, music, matrix) in case of
Dolby Pro Logic II coded broadcasts.
The movie mode is „movie focused“, that is, the
centre sound is dominant, as we are used to it in
a movie.
In music mode, you can set 3 parameters:
Width: center sound is mixed with left/right.
Change in dimension: rear and centre are mixed
with left/right.
Panorama: distance between the speakers is
increased artificially.
In matrix mode, the front speakers are „mirrored“
to the rear speakers. Front left is mixed with left rear,
right front with right rear and the centre sound is
distributed to all channels.
The menu item appears when a multi-channel
system (speaker system) is connected and
loudspeakers are simulated (e.g. DVB signal with
2.0 sound, listening mode to 5).
Sound via
Playback over the TV speakers or an external hi-fi
amplifier.
The menu item Sound via only appears if HiFi/AV
amplifier or TV speakers (switchable) is set in
the audio components wizard (see c
hapter Sys-
tem settings, section Connections – Sound
components
).
Sound
adjustment
Here, you can adapt preset sound characteristics
of the respective broadcast. Selectable are, e.g.,
Speech, Classical, Pop, Custom music and Film
soundtracks. For personal music and film sound you
can do the settings for pitch and bass sound (high
and low frequencies).
Loudness
Proper boost of bass and treble tones at low volume.
Sound
picture
synchronisa-
tion
If the sound and picture are not precisely in sync,
you may correct this here. Move the mark on the
bar downwards, slowing down the sound compared
with the picture. Move the mark upwards, speeding
it up compared with the picture. Time adjustment
of the sound occurs in steps of 10 ms in each case.
only available for DVB stations.
Volume
adjustment
The volume can differ according to the individual sta-
tions. If the sound is too loud or too quiet in relation
to other stations, adjust the volume.
more ...
call with OK (see next page).
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
74
System settings
Sound
Explanations of the sound settings (continued):
more ...
Loudspeaker/
Headphone
sound
Selection options for Mono/ Stereo or Sound 1 or
Sound 2 for bilingual programmes, separately for
the loudspeakers and the headphones.
The menu item only appears for analogue stations.
Auto volume
The volume may vary when receiving stations with
different standards, when switching from station to
station or during commercials.
You can reduce these differences in volume by
selecting auto volume on. For music and live broad-
casts you get a better sound spectrum with auto
volume off.
Maximum
volume
You can limit the volume adjustment of the loud-
speakers. This prevents selecting a volume which
is too loud.
Maximum
switch on
volume
Set the sound level to be heard after switching on the
TV set with the mains switch or after a power failure.
When switching on the TV set in standby mode, the
volume last used is retained unless it was above this
switch-on level. Otherwise it is limited by this.
Balance
Set stereo balance so that the volume impression is
identical on the left and right.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
75
System settings
Stations
Stations
Under the item Stations you find all settings concerned with station
search for TV and DVB radio as well as functions for creating and
editing the various station lists.
Station management is not possible as long as a programmed timer
recording is active.
If at least one station is locked, the access code must be entered
prior to automatic search
.
The procedure for radio stations or Station lists Radio is similar to
that for TV stations or Station lists TV. Therefore, this procedure is
described only for TV stations.
Call Stations menu
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Stations,
go to next column.
Select desired function,
 proceed to next column.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Stations menu:
Automatic
scan
TV+Radio
Here you start the wizard that searches and stores
all TV and DVB radio stations (see chapter System
settings, section Stations – Automatic scan
TV+Radio).
Manual scan
(incl.
antenna
status)
Here, you can enter all the settings available for a
TV station (see chapter System settings, section
Stations – Manual Scan TV / Radio).
Station lists
TV
Station lists
Radio
Here you can move and delete TV stations/ DVB
radio stations in all lists.
You can put together your most frequently watched
programmes in one or more lists of personal
favourites (see chapter System settings, section
Stations – Station lists TV / Radio).
Update
station list
automatically
If the channel list is not up to date, it will be updated
automatically, provided the parameter Allow is
selected (see chapter System settings, section
Stations – Update station list automatically).
Transfer all
station lists
Here you can export or import all station lists of this
TV set
(
see chapter System settings, section
Stations – Transfer all station lists
)
.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
76
Automatic scan TV+Radio
For automatic scan TV+Radio, a search wizard will be started that
searches for new stations which are not yet stored.
You have to repeat the initial installation and automatically search for
new stations if you want to delete all the existing stations and
automatically search for new ones.
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Stations,
go to next column.
Mark Automatic scan TV+Radio,
go to next column.
In the upper info text the current search settings will
now be displayed:
If you want to change these search settings:
 Select Change search settings,
OKwizard guides you through the search settings
(see column on the right).
If you agree with these settings:
 Select Start search/update,
OKstart scan.
BACK: Cancel current search/update.
Explanations of some search settings:
Signal source
Select here cable analogue, terrestrial (DVB-T /
T2), cable (DVB-C), satellite (DVB-S / S2) or IPTV
depending on the signal source you wish to use to
search for new stations.
Use the Antenna wizard to call the configuration of
the DVB-T and DVB-S antennas.
Calling up the DVB antenna configuration causes
the Change search settings dialogue to be quit.
You must call up the dialogue again after finishing
the configuration.
Cable
(analogue)
TV/colour
standard
With the selection of TV set location the conventional
TV standard/colour standard is the default.
It should only be changed if stations with other
standards are to be searched.
Explanations of some search settings (continued):
DVB-T/C/S
IPTV
Network
selection
If several networks are available, you can decide
which network you want to receive your channels
from.
DVB-T/C/S
IPTV
Settings
With the selection of set location the conventional
settings will be preset. Only change these defaults
if you are familiar with other parameters.
Scrambled stations:
(DVB-T/C/S)
You can state whether scrambled stations are to be
searched for in the search/update. If you select yes,
coded stations will also be searched for. However,
these stations can only be received in connection
with a CA module and the appropriate Smart Card.
Ask your dealer which Smart Card you need to
receive certain stations.
Search method: (DVB-T)
If you want to run the station search independently
of the channel grid, select Frequency search for
the search method.
Search method: (DVB-C)
If you select Frequency search here, a search is
performed for all receivable stations. With Network
search, only the stations which the networks sup-
ply are searched - either for all receivable networks
or only for the particular network specified under
Network ID.
Network ID: (DVB-C)
If you select none here, DVB signals of all current
broadcasting networks are scanned automatically
(recommended for most cable networks).
If, on the other hand, you specify a certain network ID
(necessary in the cable networks of some countries),
only DVB signals of this broadcasting network are
searched for automatically. Your cable provider has
the information you need.
Search method: (DVB-S)
If you select Frequency search here, a search is
performed for all receivable stations. With Network
search, from all receivable networks all the stations
are searched which are supplied by these networks.
Accept Logical Channel Number: (DVB-T/C/S)
In various countries, digital stations (DVB-T/C/S) are
transmitted with a preset channel number per
station, known as Logical Channel Numbers (LCN).
If you select yes here, these default channel slots
will be used and the channels of the preferred signal
source will be sorted as per LCN. The stations in the
station list can no longer be shifted.
System settings
Stations
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
77
System settings
Stations
Search for/update stations – handling of new and no longer
found stations
After the automatic search/update has been concluded, the number
of newly found TV and radio stations is shown.
Call list of new TV stations found.
 Select station.
OK Mark / unmark station.
Stores the marked TV stations.
Afterwards, a list of the stations which are saved but
which are temporarily not broadcasting or no longer
exist is displayed, if available.
The number of the memory location used is displayed
in front of the station. Please select the stations you
really want to delete.
 Select station.
OK Mark / unmark station.
Proceed. The marked TV stations will be deleted.
Subsequently the process of Newly found
stations/Stations no longer found shall be
carried out in the same way for the radio stations.
Back: Close search assistant.
Manual Scan TV / Radio
Here, you can enter all the settings available for a station. However,
this requires detailed knowledge.
The manual search of radio stations is similar to that of TV stations.
Therefore, the manual search for radio station is not dealt with
separately.
Calling manual search
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Stations,
go to next column.
Mark Manual Scan (incl. antenna status),
OKcall Manual Scan.
Select the menu item Signal source to decide in which
area you want to search for stations.
Depending on the selected source, various setting
possibilities will be available.
On the next page, the settings for analogue cable and
DVB-T/C/S sources are described separately.
Status bar for manual search
Status bars are displayed for manual search, which
show the reception quality of the individual stations
during the station scan. The markers in all bars should
preferably be in the green area.
C/N: (Carrier/Noise) The bar shows the signal-to-
noise ratio. The value indicated in dB should be
preferably high.
Level: The bar shows the receiving level of the station.
The value displayed in dBμV should be preferably high.
BER: (Bit Error Rate) The bar shows the bit error rate
of the station. The value for BER should be as low as
possible.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
78
System settings
Stations
Manual search for cable analogue (analogue cable reception):
Manual search is called.
Cable analogue has been selected as signal source.
 Mark and adjust settings,
OK confirm as the case may be.
 Mark Search,
OK start search.
If a station has been found:
 Mark Store/Overwrite,
OK store station.
Explanations on the search settings for cable analogue:
Signal source Selection of range in which you want to search for the
station.
TV standard
If necessary, ask your dealer which standard to
select for specific channels or AV equipment.
Colour
standard
If necessary, ask your dealer which standard to
select for specific channels or AV equipment.
Channel
Direct input of channel.
Frequency
Direct input of station frequency.
Range for entry: 044.75 MHz - 859.25 MHz.
Name
Here, the name of the found station is displayed. You
can change the name of the station.
Manual DVB-T/C/S search:
Manual search is called.
 Mark and adjust settings,
OK confirm as the case may be.
 Mark Search,
OK start search.
When a DVB transponder has been found:
 Mark the station,
OK Station will be ticked with
. If necessary,
repeat for several stations.
Stations that already exist in the station overview
will be displayed with their station number on the
left.
 Mark Store/Overwrite,
OK Stations marked with
will be stored.
Explanations of some search settings:
Signal
source
(DVB-T/C/S)
Selection of range in which you want to search for the
station.
Channel
(DVB-T)
Direct input of channel.
Satellite
(DVB-S)
Here you can select the satellite where the stations
are to be searched for.
Band
(DVB-S)
Here you can select the frequency band in which
shall be searched.
Setting ranges: horiz/low 10694 - 11906 MHz
horiz/high 11544 - 12756 MHz
vert/low 10694 - 11906 MHz
vert/high 11544 - 12756 MHz
Frequency
(DVB-T/C/S)
DVB-T/C: Direct input of station frequency.
DVB-S: Direct input of LNC frequency
Symbol rate
(DVB-S)
Here you can specify the symbol rate
Range: 1000-45000
1 Das Erste HD
13 arte
14 Einsfestival
20 WDR Köln HD
26 EinsPlus
1 Das Erste HD
13 arte
14 Einsfestival
20 WDR Köln HD
26 EinsPlus
32 tagesschau24
54 Phoenix
87 ARD-alpha
32 tagesschau24
54 Phoenix
87 ARD-alpha
...
Found stations
Search Store/Overwrite
Mark/unmark with
OK
Back
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
79
System settings
Stations
Station lists TV / Radio
Under the menu item Station lists TV or Station lists Radio you
can edit (delete block, move block, restore deleted stations, delete
list) various lists, e.g., DVB-T, ASTRA LCN, DVB-C, etc. You can also
create and edit new Personal lists.
The function of Station lists Radio is similar to that of Station lists
TV. Therefore, editing of Station lists Radio will not be dealt with
separately.
Change station list
If at least one station is locked, the access code must
be entered before changing stations
.
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call system settings.
 Mark Stations,
go to next column.
 Select Station lists TV,
go to next column.
 Mark desired station list,
 call list.
Here, you can delete and move station blocks as well
as restore deleted stations.
The following section describes how to proceed if you
wish to Delete block, Move block,Restore stations
and Delete list.
Delete block
 Select Delete Block,
move to list.
 Select beginning of block,
OK mark beginning of block.
 Select end of block,
OK mark end of block (selected stations are coloured
blue).
 Select Execute delete,
OK block will be deleted, or
 select Cancel procedure,
OK cancel delete.
Move block / Change order
Stations with LCN cannot be reordered. In this case,
the function Move block is hidden.
 Select Move block,
move to list.
 Select beginning of block,
OK mark beginning of block.
 Select end of block,
OK mark end of block (selected stations are coloured
blue).
 Select insert position,
OK Confirm insert position.
 Select Execute move,
OK block will be moved, or
 select Cancel procedure,
OK cancel move.
Restore stations
 Select Restore stations,
move to list.
 Select beginning of block,
OK mark beginning of block.
 Select end of block,
OK mark end of block (selected stations are coloured
blue).
 Select Restore stations,
OK stations will be added again to the station list, or
 select Cancel procedure,
OK cancel restore.
Delete list
 Select Delete list,
OK confirm delete list.
OK Confirm delete.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
80
System settings
Stations
Compose / edit Personal list
Each personal list can contain up to 99 stations. You can compose the
personal lists to suit your convenience (e.g., topic lists). Other persons
using this TV set can create their own personal lists.
Creating and updating personal station lists is not possible as long
as a programmed timer recording is active.
Create / edit New personal list
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Stations,
go to next column.
 Mark Station lists TV,
go to next column.
 Mark New personal list,
OKNew personal list x will be created.
x stands for the number of the personal list.
The number depends on how many list were
already created.

Mark the station in the station list which is to be
added to the personal list.
OK adds the station to the personal list.
The new station will be added at the end of the
personal list. Proceed in the same way with addi-
tional stations.
Call up additional options.
ASTRA LCN
DVB-T
DVB-C
Examples of station lists. Select the station list from
which you add stations to the personal list. In the
personal list you can store stations from different
sources.
Sorting The sorting procedure for the source station list may
be changed between numerical and alphabetical.
BACK: Store and close station list.
...
14 ProSieben
13 n-tv
1 SAT.1
2 ZDF HD
3 BR Nord HD
4 3sat HD
5 ZDF Neo HD
15 3sat HD
16 ARTE HD
17 EinsPlus
18 Eurosport
19 ZDF Neo HD
20 ZDF.kultur
ASTRA1
19,2°E
Personal list 1
New
personal list
Add station to personal list:
Mark in right-hand column and press to add.
Delete station from personal list:
Mark and press to remove.
Select other station list / sorting in right-hand
column with "right menu control button"
Use to save new list.
OK
OK
Adding stations to Personal list
The Personal list must be opened to add new
stations to it.

Select Add/remove Stations in the function list.
How to add stations is described in the left column.
Deleting stations from the Personal list
The Personal list must be opened to delete stations
in it.
 Select Add/remove Stations in the function list,
OKactivate.
go to personal list.

Mark the station to be deleted in the personal list,
OK activate. Function of the coloured keys in standard
PIP functionality.
BACK: Store and close station list.
Move / reorder stations in the Personal list
The personal list must be opened to move stations
in it.
 Select Move stations in the function list,
OKactivate.

Select station to be moved in the Personal list,
OK mark (station will be coloured blue).

Select insert position (insert position will be
marked with a blue line),
OK Execute move. Proceed in the same way with
additional stations.
BACK: Store and close station list.
Renaming the Personal list
The Personal list to be renamed must be opened.
 Select Rename list in the function list,
OKactivate.
Enter new name.
 Select Adopt.
OK New name for the personal list will be adopted.
Delete Personal list
The Personal list to be deleted must be opened.
Deleting of the list is irrevocable.
 Select Delete list in the function list,
OKactivate.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
81
System settings
Stations
Update station list automatically
Some programme providers offer an automatic update of the sta-
tion lists (Dynamic Channel Management). You may Allow or Block
an automatic station list update. If automatic updating is allowed, a
screen message about an available update appears whenever the
list is changed.
Allow/block updates
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Stations,
go to next column.
Mark Update station list automatically,
go to next column.
 Select Allow or Block,
OK adopt.
If the channel list is not up to date, it will be
updated automatically, provided the option Allow
is selected.
Updating the station list
A message appears whenever the TV is switched on if the network
provider changes their channel list.
In Update station list automatically, Allow must
be selected.
 Select the desired procedure.
...
Allow
Block
If the channel list is not up to date, it will be automatically
updated provided the parameter "Allow" is selected.
Because your network provider has changed its station list, it has to be adapted
on your TV set as well. Please specify when you wish to do this.
At once
After switch off to standby
Later
Update station list
Proceed with
At once
The station list will be immediately updated. Normally
this occurs in the background without interfering
further with the TV‘s operation. In exceptional cases,
it is however possible that during this process an
automatic station change may be necessary.
After switch
off to
standby
The channel list will be updated the next time the TV
set is switched off into standby mode.
Later
Updating the channel list will be postponed to a later
date. When the TV set is switched on and off, the
update message will appear again.
OK Confirm selection.
Transfer all station lists
You can export all station lists of your TV set to a USB storage device
or import station lists.
Calling Transfer all station lists
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Stations,
go to next column.
Mark Transfer all station lists,
OK call.
 Select a target if several USB storage media
are available.
 Mark Export or Import,
OK confirm selection.
When you import station lists, all station lists are
overwritten in this device.
Before you remove the USB storage again, you need
to safely disconnect it with ‚Unmount‘ from the TV
set to prevent data loss.
...
Back
Export
Import Unmount
Transfer all
station lists
Here you can export or import all station lists of this TV set. To do this,
select the data storage device.
Before you remove the USB storage again, you need to safely disconnect
it with 'Unmount' from the TV set to prevent data loss.
Attention: When you import station lists, all station lists are overwritten in
this device!
Target USB1
Transfer all sation lists
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
82
System settings
Control
Control
In the chapter Control you find settings for the various operating modes
like PIP and DR+ as well as settings referring in an interfunctional way
to your TV set like, for example, time and date and on-screen displays.
Calling Control
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Select Control,
go to next column.
Select desired menu item,
go to next column.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Control menu:
Language
Here you can define the menu language and for DVB
stations also the subtitle and audio language.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
Language for further information.
Parental
lock
With the parental lock you can bar access to all
stations immediately or daily for a certain period of
time. The stations can also be locked individually.
Age-dependent locking of programs with an appro-
priate age code is also possible.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
Parental lock for further information.
EPG
Here you can do all EPG settings.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
EPG for further information.
Energy
efficiency
Here you can determine how energy efficient your
TV set shall be.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
Energy efficiency for further information.
Quick start
mode
Here you can enable the Quick Start Mode. The TV
set will then immediately switch on from standby
without delay.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
Quick start mode for further information.
Software
update
Here you can download new software from a USB
storage medium or from the Internet (as far as
requirements exist for this).
See chapter System settings, section Control –
Software update for further information.
Control
Language
Parental
lock
Energy effi-
ciency
Software
more ...
EPG
Here you can define the menu language and for DVB
stations also the subtitle and audio language.
Quick start
mode
more ...
After confirmation with the OK key you will be offered
additional not so frequently used sub items for the
current menu item.
On-screen
displays
Here you can make settings for the duration, position
and existence of special on-screen displays.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
On-screen displays for further information.
Time and
date
The time and date are normally obtained
automatically from the TV.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
Time and date for further information.
DVB settings
Here you can make settings which only refer to DVB
stations (subtitles and audio mode, DVB character
set).
See chapter System settings, section Control –
DVB settings for further information.
PIP
In this menu you can make all adjustments for the
picture-in-picture display.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
PIP for further information.
DR+
Here you can do all the settings for the digital re-
corder.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
DR+ for further information.
Standard
Teletext
Here you can do all Standard Teletext settings.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
Standard Teletext for further information.
HbbTV
Here you can do all settings for the HbbTV mode.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
HbbTV for further information.
Hard disks
Here you find tools to format or check the hard disks.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
Hard disks for further information.
Export log file
The log file available in the system is exported to a
USB storage device.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
Export log file.
key
function
Here you can assign another function to the Aster-
isk key. The selected function will then be called
directly when the key is pressed.
See chapter System settings, section Control –
Asterik key function for further information.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
83
System settings
Control
Language
Specify the language for all menus in the TV set in the language menu.
The language for the DVB subtitles and the film language can be set
for DVB programmes.
Call language
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark Language,
go to next column.
 Select desired setting and make changes.
OKAdopt settings.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Language menu:
Menu
You can change the menu language here.
Subtitle
(DVB)
If subtitles are provided by the DVB station, you can
set your desired language in advance here. If this is
included in the range of languages of the station, it
will be shown automatically.
You can also specify an alternative language under
this menu item, in case your chosen language is not
offered by the station.
Audio (DVB)
Specify your desired film language in advance here.
If this is included in the range of languages of the
station, it will be shown automatically.
You can also specify an alternative language under
this menu item, in case your chosen language is not
offered by the station.
.........
Language
Menu Subtitle (DVB) Audio (DVB)
Deutsch (de) ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ (el) Svenska (sv)
English (en) Polski (pl) Dansk (da)
Français (fr) Magyar (hu) Português (pt)
Italiano (it) Suomi (fi) ȇɭɫɫɤɢɣ (ru)
Español (es) Slovenščina (sl) Norsk (no)
Nederlands (nl) Slovenčina (sk) (zh)
Čeština (cs) Türkçe (tr)
Menu Subtitle (DVB) Audio (DVB)
Deutsch (de) ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ (el) Svenska (sv)
English (en) Polski (pl) Dansk (da)
Français (fr) Magyar (hu) Português (pt)
Italiano (it) Suomi (fi) ȇɭɫɫɤɢɣ (ru)
Español (es) Slovenščina (sl) Norsk (no)
Nederlands (nl) Slovenčina (sk) 中文 (zh)
Čeština (cs) Türkçe (tr)
Language
You can change the menu language here.
Back
EPG
Calling EPG settings
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark EPG,
go to next column.
Explanation of the EPG setting options:
Station
selection TV
Station
selection
Radio
In the Station selection you can determine for
which station in the programme guide, information
is to be displayed. Programme information is only
displayed for stations with
in the EPG list. Using
the on-screen buttons in the bottom line you can
mark all stations or unmark the stations or select
stations from specific (e.g., personal) lists.
Further information on EPG station selection you
find in chapter TV, section Electronic Programme
Guide – EPG wizard.
Due to the large number of receivable stations you
should restrict the station selection. This reduces the
data entry time and increases the clarity in the EPG.
Data
capture
Here you can switch the data entry for the electronic
programme guide (EPG) on and off.
If the data capture is switched on, your TV set tries to
update the database overnight (normally between 2
and 5 am) or, if required, two minutes after switching
to stand-by mode. The TV set must be on stand-by
for this and not switched off at the mains switch.
The indicator on the TV set lights blue during data
capture in stand-by mode.
The data are also updated while you are watching
the EPG station.
TV on when
memorised
When yes is selected in the setting, the switched off
TV switches on automatically in standby mode at
the beginning of a memorised programme. A screen
message appears when switching on. If this is not
confirmed within 5 minutes with the OK key, the TV
switches automatically off again for safety reasons.
Clear data
base
This menu item allows you to remove all data from
EPG database. It will take some time to retrieve this
data again.
......
EPG
Station se-
lection TV
Data cap-
ture
TV on when
memorised
Please mark the stations with for which you want a
program preview.
OK
Clear data-
base
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
84
System settings
Control
Parental lock
You can select and set various security options to prevent
unauthorised use of the TV set and to protect your children from
unsuitable programmes.
Call Parental lock menu
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark Parental lock,
go to next column.
Define a four digit access code (PIN) the first time you
open it. Note the access code (PIN) well.
The access code must not consist of the same four
digits.
 Mark Adopt,
OK activate.
The new PIN must be entered and confirmed again.
The Parental lock menu will be opened.
The four-digit access code (PIN) must be entered
when the parental lock is opened in future. For security
reasons, it appears encrypted (****) when entering.
Note for unlocking
As soon as the PIN has once been entered to unlock your TV set, all
currently set parental locks will be disabled temporarily. Besides of the
general locks described in this chapter, this is also valid for parental
lock of DR+ archive entries. Parental locks will only be re-enabled when
the TV set is switched off.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
|
......
Parental lock
Define 4 digit access code and memorise it, please.
(Note: The same digit must not be used four times).
Define 4 digit access code and memorise it, please.
(Note: The same digit must not be used four times).
Parental lock
Cancel
Back
With the parental lock you can bar access to all stations immediately or daily for a certain period of time. The stations
can also be locked individually. Age dependent locking of prorams with an appropriate age code is also possible.
......
Parental
lock
Lock all stations Lock single stations Age-related lock Change acces code Deactivate
Immediately no yes
Daily no yes, from 00:00 until 00:00
Parental lock
Back
You can bar access to all stations. This can be done immediately or daily for a certain period of time.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Parental lock menu:
Lock all
stations
The TV set is locked immediately the menu is exited.
All programmes can then only be watched after
entering the access code.
The lock can be activated both Immediately and
for a Daily defined period.
The lock remains active until it is switched off in the
menu.
Lock single
stations
You can lock / unlock individual or all of the stations
in the station list specifically.
The lock remains active until it is switched off in the
menu.
Age-related
lock
Some DVB stations also broadcast an age
classification. If the age set here is below the
broadcast age limit, the programme can only be
watched after entering the access code.
Change
access code
You can change your access code at any time. Enter
the new access code in place of the old one.
Deactivate
All set parental locks (locked stations, age-
dependent locks, locked films in the DR+ archive)
are cancelled. The current secret code is deleted.
When the parental lock is reactivated all the previous
parental locks are set again automatically.
Reset
All currently set parental locks are finally cancelled.
The access code is deleted.
Protection of minors for CI Plus programmes
Youth-protected broadcasts of programme providers with CI Plus
encoding possibly require you to enter the secret number (PIN) of
the CA module.
The Parental lock PIN of the CA module can be store in the TV set.
We recommend selecting the secret number of the TV set according
to the secret number of the CA module, since the secret number of
the CA module cannot be changed. This means that you must only
remember one secret number.
Code number
The code number cancels all entered access codes. It can be used for
example if you have forgotten your PIN. In the supplied operating manual
you find a note on the access code number. Remove this one from the
operating manual and keep it in a safe place.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
85
System settings
Control
Energy efficiency
Determine how energy efficient your TV set shall be. The value for
the contrast (and thus the brightness of the background lighting)
is adapted and the automatic dimmer activated or deactivated
depending on the presetting.
Call Energy efficiency
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark Energy efficiency,
go to next column.
 Select desired setting and make changes.
OKAdopt settings.
Explanations of the setting options in the energy efficiency
menu:
Home Mode
The emphasis for home use is on low energy
consumption. The automatic dimmer is activated.
Choosing Home Mode automatically activates
shutdown.
Premium
Mode
This mode optimises the settings to a brighter
environment at a higher energy consumption. The
automatic dimmer is activated.
The use of this energy efficiency setting must be
confirmed afterwards once again.
Shop Mode
The picture settings are aligned to operation in
the presentation room. The automatic dimmer is
deactivated. If the ambient brightness diminishes,
the energy consumption is not reduced.
The use of this energy efficiency setting must be
confirmed afterwards once again.
Quick start mode
If you enable the Quick Start Mode and you switch on the TV set from
standby, the TV picture can be immediately seen without delay. You
can specify the times at which your device will be in the Quick Start
Mode.
Please note that in this case you will have a higher energy consumption.
Default setting for the Quick Start Mode: no
Call Quick start mode
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark Quick start mode,
go to next column.
 Select desired setting and make changes.
You can individually change the suggested
times.
OKAdopt settings.
...
Quick start
mode
Here you can specify the times at which your device should be in quick
start mode.
Quick start mode
Back
Here you can specify the times at which your device should be in quick start mode.
Period1 no yes, from 06:00 until 09:00
Period2 no yes, from 11:00 until 15:00
Period3 no yes, from 18:00 until 21:00
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
86
Software update
It is possible to update the software on your Loewe TV set.
In the software update (package update) all the software releases in
the TV are scanned and updated as required.
Here you can download a new piece of software from different sources
(if existing).
Current software versions can be downloaded from the Loewe Internet
site (see below) and installed on your TV set using a USB stick.
If your TV set is connected to the Internet, the TV set can be updated
directly via the Internet (see chapter System settings, section
Control – Manual update via the Internet).
Updating the software is not possible as long as a programmed
timer recording is active.
When a software update occurs it may happen that timer entries and
memorised programmes are deleted. After such a software update,
check your timer list
(see chapter Recordings, section Timer –
Timer list).
Please be aware of the requirements of your USB stick in section
Technical data – Media.
Software download from the Loewe Internet site for update
via USB
Where available, you can download new software for your TV set from
our homepage.
Visit our homepage under:
www.loewe.tv/int/my-loewe
Choose the item Register now on the Service homepage. Simply
follow the steps in the registration process.
After the successful registration process and subsequent login to the
support homepage you have to register your TV set (have the article
number and serial number ready – both of these are on a label stuck
to the back of the set or can be looked up under System settings ט
Extras ט Integrated features.
Then you will get a list of downloadable contents for your TV set
including the software. Download the data and unpack all the files in
this ZIP archive into the main directory of your USB stick.
Then carry out the software update as described below.
USB stick - requirements
USB sticks tested by Loewe and compatible in type and format can
be ordered from the Loewe dealer using the article no. 90456.900.
If you would like to use your own USB stick, please follow these tips/
conditions:
Formatting in FAT32.
Just one partition.
Do not use encrypted USB sticks.
Do not use USB sticks that simulate a CD ROM drive.
There may be no hidden files on the device.
For some types of device, the construc-
tion of the USB stick is significant.
Maximum dimensions in mm: 70x20x10.
If in doubt, the USB stick should be formatted as “FAT32” without
“extended attributes”.
In order to avoid problems during the software update of the tv set
the USB stick in use should meet the requirements.
System settings
Control
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
87
System settings
Control
Software update via USB storage device
To do this, plug the USB stick with the downloaded software into a
free USB port of the TV set.
Calling Software update
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark Software,
go to next column.
 Mark Software update,
go to next column.
 Mark Via USB,
call Software update.
The version of the software package that is
currently installed will be displayed.
Proceed.
The TV set searches for a new software package
on the USB stick.
If a new software version is available after the search,
an on-screen message appears (see right hand
column).
If several different software packages are found on the
USB stick, the latest software package is always used.
If no new software package was found in the search:
BACK:End of wizard.
New software package found
Proceed starts loading of the new software.
Or:
BACK: End of wizard.
The update will then not be carried out.
Load new software package
The software is loaded in several steps. The total loading
and programming process can take up to approx. 50
minutes in total.
Please do not switch off your TV set with the mains
switch during the entire loading and programming
process.
After the update, the TV set is automatically powered
off and on again.
Depending on the software loaded, it is possible that
the device may not turn off automatically after the
update. Therefore, please supervise the update
process.
When the TV set is switched on again, a message is
displayed.
BACK:End of wizard.
...... Via USB
New software
Proceed withProceed with End withEnd with
A new software version was found.
New software: V1.1.14.0 (Current software: V.1.1.11.0)
If you now wish to load the new software, press the button. Otherwise
close with the button.
Ensure that the TV set is not switched off at the mains while it is loading the
data.
A new software version was found.
New software: V1.1.14.0 (Current software: V.1.1.11.0)
If you now wish to load the new software, press the button. Otherwise
close with the button.
Ensure that the TV set is not switched off at the mains while it is loading the
data.
60%
...
... Via USB
Note: The loading and programming process can take up to approx. 50 minutes
in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.
Note: The TV set will automatically restart after programming. You will then be
informed about the end of the programming in a dialogue.
Note: The loading and programming process can take up to approx. 50 minutes
in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.
Note: The TV set will automatically restart after programming. You will then be
informed about the end of the programming in a dialogue.
Updating software
The "V1.1.14.0" software is currently being programmed, please wait ...
The software was successfully updated.
Hint
Finish wizard with
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
88
System settings
Control
Manual update via the Internet
If an Internet connection is available, new software can be downloaded
directly and installed onto the TV set.
Calling Software update
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark Software,
go to next column.
 Mark Software update,
go to next column.
 Mark Via Internet,
go to next column.
You will see a message on the screen regarding
data protection.
If you are not in agreement with the relevant data being
passed on:
BACK: Exit the update process.
The update will then not be carried out.
Otherwise: Confirm data protection message by press-
ing .
The version of the software package that is currently
installed will be displayed.
Proceed.
The TV set connects to the Internet and scans the
update server for new software.
If a new software version is available after the search, an
on-screen message appears (see right hand column).
If no new software package was found in the search:
BACK: End of wizard.
...
Start update
In accordance with § 33 of the Federal Data Protection Act (BDSG) we point out
that machine numbers and the installation site of your TV set , as well as the
current updates and the current software status in each case, are processed and
saved by a computer system if you use the button to confirm. This data
ensures that we are always able to provide you with optimal service. All data is
handled confidentially.
If you do not wish this to be the case, please press the button.
SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD - Data protection
Proceed with End with
......
Start update
Current software: 1.1.11.0
To load a new piece of software, you first need to search for said software on the
update server. Press the key to start the search.
SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD - Current software
Proceed withBack with
New software package found
Proceed starts loading of the new software.
Or:
BACK: End of wizard.
The update will then not be carried out.
Load new software package
Only the parts of the software package that are not up
to date will be automatically downloaded from the
Internet and updated.
Each part of the software is downloaded individually
from the Internet and is then programmed.
The total time required for all the software parts to be
downloaded from the Internet is dependent on the
speed of data transfer that is being used.
The total programming process can take up to 50
minutes in total.
Please do not switch off your TV set with the mains
switch during the entire loading and programming
process.
After the update, the TV set is automatically powered
off and on again.
Depending on the software loaded, it is possible that
the device may not turn off automatically after the
update. Therefore, please supervise the update
process.
When the TV set is switched on again, a message is
displayed.
BACK:End of wizard.
......
New software
Proceed withProceed with End withEnd with
A new software version was found.
New software: V1.1.14.0 (Current software: V1.1.11.0)
If you now wish to load the new software, press the button. Otherwise
close with the button.
Ensure that the TV set is not switched off at the mains while it is loading the
data.
A new software version was found.
New software: V1.1.14.0 (Current software: V1.1.11.0)
If you now wish to load the new software, press the button. Otherwise
close with the button.
Ensure that the TV set is not switched off at the mains while it is loading the
data.
Start update
60%
...
-NSD3GDKN@CHMF@MCOQNFQ@LLHMFOQNBDRRB@MS@JDTOSN@OOQNWLHMTSDR
in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.
Note: The TV set will automatically restart after programming. You will then be
informed about the end of the programming in a dialogue.
-NSD3GDKN@CHMF@MCOQNFQ@LLHMFOQNBDRRB@MS@JDTOSN@OOQNWLHMTSDR
in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.
Note: The TV set will automatically restart after programming. You will then be
informed about the end of the programming in a dialogue.
Updating software
The "V1.1.14.0" software is currently being programmed, please wait ...
Start update
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
89
Software update via Antenna
A software update via antenna is only available for stations of the
Freeview DVB-T platform in the UK and Ireland.
Calling Software update
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark Software,
go to next column.
 Mark Software update,
go to next column.
 Mark Via Antenna,
call Software update.
You will see a message on the screen regarding
data protection.
Proceed.
The TV set searches for a new software package.
If a new software version is available after the search, an
on-screen message appears (see below).
If no new software package was found in the search:
BACK: End of wizard.
New software package found
Proceed starts loading of the new software.
Or:
BACK: End of wizard.
The update will then not be carried out.
... Via antenna
Current software: 1.1.11.0
For loading a new software, it is mandatory to have the antenna cable attached
to the TV. Start search pressing the key .
SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD - Current software
Proceed with Cancel with
...
Proceed withProceed with End withEnd with
Via antenna
New software
A new software version was found.
New software: V1.1.14.0 (Current software: V1.1.11.0)
If you now wish to load the new software, press the button. Otherwise
close with the button.
Ensure that the TV set is not switched off at the mains while it is loading the
data.
A new software version was found.
New software: V1.1.14.0 (Current software: V1.1.11.0)
If you now wish to load the new software, press the button. Otherwise
close with the button.
Ensure that the TV set is not switched off at the mains while it is loading the
data.
Load new software package
The software is downloaded in several steps. The total
downloading and programming process can take up to
approx. 50 minutes in total.
Please do not switch off your TV set with the mains
switch during the entire loading and programming
process.
After the update, the TV set is automatically powered
off and on again.
Depending on the software loaded, it is possible that
the device may not turn off automatically after the
update. Therefore, please supervise the update
process.
When the TV set is switched on again, a message is
displayed.
BACK:End of wizard.
60%
...
-NSD3GDKN@CHMF@MCOQNFQ@LLHMFOQNBDRRB@MS@JDTOSN@OOQNWLHMTSDR
in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.
Note: The TV set will automatically restart after programming. You will then be
informed about the end of the programming in a dialogue.
-NSD3GDKN@CHMF@MCOQNFQ@LLHMFOQNBDRRB@MS@JDTOSN@OOQNWLHMTSDR
in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.
Note: The TV set will automatically restart after programming. You will then be
informed about the end of the programming in a dialogue.
Updating software
The "V1.1.14.0" software is currently being programmed, please wait ...
Via antenna
The software was successfully updated.
Hint
Finish wizard with
System settings
Control
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
90
Automatic update via the internet
Your TV set checks at definite intervals whether a newer software than
the one installed in the TV set is available in the Internet. If this is the
case, you can find this out by a screen message.
In order to get informed about the new software, the TV set must
be connected to the Internet.
The Inform about new software item can also be switched on/
off at the end of initial installation.
Showing/Hiding information on new software
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark Software,
go to next column.
 Mark Software update,
go to next column.
 Mark Via Internet,
go to next column.
 Mark Inform about new software,
go to next column.
 Select yes / no,
OK Adopt.
...
yes
no
Here you can load new software from a USB storage
medium, via the internet or using aerial reception
(provided the respective prerequisites are provided).
System settings
Control
New software package found
For the menu item Information on new software updates , yes
is selected (see left column).
If the TV set has found a new software version during the check, you
will be informed about this via a screen message.
 Select the desired procedure.
Load the
software
now
After confirmation, the new TV software will be
loaded from the internet and then programmed.
Load the
software
when
switch off to
standby
The software will be loaded and programmed after
the TV set has been switched off into standby mode
for the next time. The display on the control panel
will light up blue during the update.
The TV set must not be switched off at the mains
before the downloading process is complete (control
panel display lights up white)!
Load the
software
later (at
most
three-fold
notification)
Loading the software will be postponed to a later date.
The new software message will be displayed the next
time the TV set is switched on.
If the loading process is postponed three times then
the message will only be shown again once the next
software version is available.
Do not
load this
software
version
The new software will not be loaded. The on-screen
message will only be shown again for the next soft-
ware version.
Confirm selection.
A new software version is now available and can be downloaded from the internet.
New software: V1.1.12.0 (Current software: V1.1.11.0)
Please specify how you would like to continue:
Load new software now
Load software when switching off to standby
Load software later (max. 3 times notification)
Do not load this software version
SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD - New software
Adopt with
OK
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
91
System settings
Control
On-screen displays
You can select different settings in this menu which affect the on-
screen displays.
Call On-screen displays
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark more ...,
call other settings.
 Mark On-screen displays,
go to next column.
 Select desired setting and make changes.
OKAdopt settings.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the On-screen
displays menu:
Display time
Here you set the duration of the display, e.g. for
the volume or the station display when changing
stations.
The duration can be set between 2 and 9 seconds.
Volume
display
Here you set whether a volume change is also to be
indicated visibly on the screen.
Automatic
menu info
Herewith you activate/deactivate the info text
displays for the currently selected menu item.
Key
explanation
If yes is set, the assignment of special remote control
keys is indicated together with the TV status display.
Permanent
clock display
The time display can be permanently shown. It is
always visible as long as no other display is made.
Automatic
HDMI hint
If yes is set here, a message about the adapted func-
tion of the remote control is shown whenever you
switch over to an HDMI channel position to which a
Digital Link HD capable TV set is connected.
Upper info
display
This activates/deactivates the right-hand additional
on-screen display in the status bar when switching
between channels.
Switch off
curtain
Here you can specify whether there is a switch-off
curtain (0 = no curtain) and how long this one needs
for closing.
......
On-screen
displays
Display time
Volume display
Automatic menu info
Key explanation
Permanent clock display
Automatic HDMI hint
Right info display
Switch off curtain
On-screen displays
If you select "on" here, the informational text belonging to each selected menu item will always appear
simultaneously.
Back
< 7sec >
off on
off on
off on
off on
off on
off on
< 7sec >
< 7sec >
off on
on
off on
off on
on
off on
< 7sec >
Time and date
The time and date are normally acquired automatically by the TV
set. If the data is missing or wrong, you can adjust it via the time and
date menu.
Call Time and date
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark more ...,
call other settings.
 Mark Time and date,
go to next column.
 Select desired setting and make changes.
OKAdopt settings.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Time and date menu:
Data capture
If you need to set the time and date entries manually,
turn off the automatic setting here.
Time zone
The current time at the Greenwich Meridian 0 is to be
understood as world time. The time shift in relation to
this time must be given in hours (–11 to +13).
Changeover
summer time
/ winter time
If the summer time in your country is changed to
Daylight-saving time, select yes please.
Beginning of
daylight-
saving time
Enter the date on which the time is switched over to
summer time if it deviates from the automatically
calculated date. This menu item appears only if yes
was selected for Daylight-saving time.
Only possible when
changeover summer time/
winter time – yes
has been selected.
End
of daylight-
saving time
Enter the date on which the summer time ends if
it deviates from the automatically calculated date.
This menu item appears only if yes was selected for
Daylight-saving time.
O
nly possible when
changeover summer time/
winter time – yes
has been selected.
Time
Date
Enter the time (00:00 to 23:59) / date (day.month.
year) with the numerical keys of the remote control.
O
nly possible when
Data capture - off or when
time has not been automatically acquired.
...
Time and
date
Data capture
Time zone
Changeover summer time/winter time
Beginning of daylight-saving time
End of daylight-saving time
Note: The following data is automatically obtained.
Time
Date
Time and date
Automatic Off
< +01:00 hour(s) >
no yes
29.03.
25.10.
14:26:12
10.02.2015
Automatic Off
< +01:00 hour(s) >
29.03.
25.10.
14:26:12
back
If you need to manually set the time and date entries, turn off automatic mode.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
92
System settings
Control
DVB settings
You can make general pre-settings for DVB stations.
Calling DVB settings
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark more ...,
call other settings.
 Mark DVB settings,
go to next column.
Explanation of the DVB setting options:
Subtitle
mode
Here you can preset whether a subtitle is always to
be displayed as soon as it is offered by the station.
A special subtitle for impaired hearing can also be
selected.
Subtitles are not offered by all stations. Many stations
only broadcast subtitles by teletext.
DVB
character
set
Select the DVB character set so that the title of the
broadcast of your favourite received station or the
texts of your CA module are displayed correctly.
Audio
commentary
You can preset the system here to always play
a special soundtrack for the visually impaired
whenever one is available. This soundtrack uses an
audio commentary to describe the action taking
place on-screen.
...
DVB settings
Subtitle mode Off normal For hearing-impaired persons
DVB character set Western European Standard Polish Greek Turkish
Audio commentary off on
Subtitle mode Off normal For hearing-impaired persons
DVB character set Western European Standard Polish Greek Turkish
off on
DVB settings
Back
Here you can preset whether a subtitle is always to be displayed as soon as it is offered by the station. A special subtitle
for impaired hearing can also be selected.
PIP
Adjust size of the PIP image
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark more ...,
call other settings.
Mark PIP,
go to next column.
 Select desired setting and make changes.
OKAdopt settings.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the PIP Settings menu:
Size
You can choose if your second picture faded in
(picture in picture) shall be displayed small or large.
Position
Here you can set the position of the second inserted
picture (picture in picture).
You can position the second picture on the top
right, top left, bottom right and bottom left.
...
PIP
PIP
Size Small Large
Position Upper right Upper left Bottom right Bottom left
Here you may select the size of your Picture-in-Picture fade-in.
Back
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
93
(1
for devices in DK, FIN, N or S: yes.
System settings
Control
DR
+
You can adapt the Digital Recorder to your requirements.
Call settings for the digital recorder
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark more ...,
call other settings.
 Mark DR+,
go to next column.
 Mark desired setting,
go to next column.
 Make settings,
OK confirm setting.
Explanation of the DR+ setting options
Recording
You can set a pre-record and post-record time for
timer recordings made without auto time control.
This minimizes the risk that a part of the broadcast
is not recorded due to the broadcast starting earlier
and/or finishing later.
Factory setting: pre-record time: 1 min,
post-record time: 5 min.
Notify
hidden
sections
If an entry has been hidden in an archive recording,
you can get informed by a screen message when
skipping a hidden area.
Factory setting: yes.
Smart jump
If the „Smart jump“ mode is activated you can
approach a desired place by pressing the and
buttons alternately and halving the jump width. After
every 3rd jump in the same direction the jump width
is doubled (up to a maximum of 8 minutes).
If off is set you always jump the same currently set
jump width (time) with the and buttons.
Factory setting: on
DR+
Notify hid-
den sections
Jump dis-
tance
Smart Jump
RecordingRecording
Recording
subtitles
DR+
Streaming
You may set the pre-record and post-record times here.
...
Serial
recording
tolerance
The serial recording tolerance is necessary to
avoid recording a serial more than once when it is
broadcast more than once a day.
It is only recorded when it begins within the
given time interval (start time +- series recording
tolerance).
Use the numeric button on the remote control to
enter the time (always two-digit for 01 to 60 min.).
Factory setting:
± 30 min.
Recording
subtitles
Select here whether subtitles are to be recorded for
DVB stations.
Factory setting: no
(1
.
DR+
Streaming
With this, all the settings are activated to make all
the films on your DR+ archive available to other
LOEWE TVs using your home network (or vice-versa,
e.g. allowing you to use the DR+ archive of other
LOEWE TVs).
See next page for further information.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
94
System settings
Control
Standard Teletext
In the Standard Teletext menu you can configure the Teletext.
Call Teletext settings
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark more ...,
call other settings.
 Mark Standard Teletext,
go to next column.
Explanations of the Standard Teletext menu functions:
Character set
Teletext character set can be switched to other lan-
guages (Russian, Greek, Polish and Turkish).
...
Standard
Teletext
Character
set
The programme preview pages and the page for the programme subtitles are
specified here.
Call DR+ streaming settings
The DR+ settings are called (see previous page).
 Mark DR+ Streaming,
go to next column.
 Mark desired setting,
go to next column.
 Make settings,
OK confirm setting.
Explanation of the setting options for DR+ streaming
Share DR+
archive with
other devices
Specify here whether recorded broadcasts within
your TV set’s DR+ archive are to be accessible for
viewing from other TV sets (server function).
Enabled programmes can also be played on other
UPnP-AV clients in the same network.
Also use
other
archives.
Setting yes enables you, via the archive, to also view
recordings from other TV sets that have accessible
movies within the home network (client function).
Notify
started
„Follow me“
recording
Your TV set can issue a message if a follow-me
recording has been started on another TV set, which
you can view on this TV set..
DR+
device name
Give your TV set a unique name for quick identifica-
tion in DR+ Streaming.
DR+ device
group name
Give a name for your TV set group.
Using different group names enables you to group
your TV sets as required. Only TV sets under the
same group name can exchange data.
IP port
number
IP port numbers are preset ex-factory. Under normal
circumstances they do not require amending.
DR+
standby
Set here how long your TV set is to continue to give
access to movies after it has been switched off.
This stand-by period is also activated as soon as data
exchange to another TV set has been completed.
Please be aware of increased stand-by use during
DR+ stand-by.
...
DR+
Streaming
Share DR+ ar-
DR+ device
name
Notify start-
DR+ device
group name
IP port
number
DR+ standby
If you select "yes" here, you will make the DR+ archive of
your TV set available to any other TV sets and UPnP clients
equipped with this feature. They will then be able to access
the archive over your home network.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
95
System settings
Control
HbbTV
Here you can do all settings for the HbbTV mode.
Call HbbTV settings
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark more ...,
call other settings.
 Mark HbbTV,
go to next column.
 Mark desired setting,
go to next column.
 Make settings,
OK confirm setting.
Explanation of the setting options for HbbTV
HbbTV-
Modus
When the HbbTV mode is active (factory setting),
additional services and further information (e.g., also
from the Internet) can be viewed if these are offered
by the current station.
Start
behaviour of
HbbTV-
stations
If HbbTV mode – on has been selected, you can
specify if an available HbbTV application should be
loaded automatically after the channel has been
changed or if this should only occur manually after
the red key has been pressed once.
The startup behaviour can be set for TV and radio
stations.
After loading the HbbTV application, an on screen
message is displayed (depending on the channel
that is being viewed).
Function of
the TEXT
key
With the setting Standard Teletext first (factory
setting), the standard Teletext is opened when the
TEXT key is pressed for the first time. Pressing the
TEXT key for a second time will then display the
MediaText. Pressing the TEXT key for a third time
will bring you back to the TV picture. If MediaText
first is selected, the TEXT key will do the exact
opposite.
Depending on the programme provider, the direct
Call of MediaText may not be possible. MediaText
must then be opened by means of the HbbTV
application.
...
HbbTV
HbbTV
mode
When the HbbTV mode (Hybrid broadcast broadband TV
mode) ist actvie, additional services and further information
(e.g. from the Internet) can be viewed if these offered by
the current station.
Asterisk key function
You can assign the asterisk key on the remote control unit a particular
function (App Gallery, picture/sound menu, sound mode, etc.).
The selected function is then called directly at a long keypress (ap-
prox. 2 sec.).
The assignment of the star key with Save object as favorite for the
short keypress remains unaffected.
Call Asterisk key settings
Default setting: Call App Gallery
HOME: Call Home view.
 Select System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Select Control,
go to next column.
 Select more ...,
call other settings.
 Select
key function,
go to next column.
 Select function,
OK Adopt.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
96
System settings
Control
Hard disks
Checking the hard disk
You should launch a check of the integrated hard disk once a year or
if problems arise when starting recordings (e.g. when transferring to
time-shift playback).
Call hard disk settings
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark more ...,
call other settings.
 Mark Hard disks,
go to next column.
Mark Check integrated one,
 confirm.
A warning note will be displayed.
OKPress at least for three seconds to start the
checking.
Or:
BACK: Cancel procedure.
Checking the hard disk (check disk) may take up to
20 min. Never ever switch off the TV set during a
check disk process.
After the check, a message will appear on the screen
showing the results of the check and tips on how to
resolve any problems that are present, should there
be any.
After checking of the hard disk the TV set must be
switched off and on again.
Una vez al año o en caso de problemas al
iniciar grabaciones (por ej., en el paso a la
reproducción en diferido), deberá llevar a cabo
una comprobación del disco duro integrado.
...
Hard disks
Check inte-
grated one
You should launch a check of the integrated
hard disk once a year or if problems arise
when starting recordings (e.g. when transferring
to time-shift playback).
Format
external one
Attention
Checking the hard drive
can take up to 20
minutes. To start the
process, hold down the
button for at least
three seconds.
OK
Formatting the hard disk
If problems were detected when the hard disk was being tested (see
left column), re-formatting may be able to remedy the problem.
Additionally, you can re-format the hard disk in order to quickly and
easily delete all the data stored on it.
Warning!
Formatting the hard disk will erase all data stored on it!
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark more ...,
call other settings.
 Mark Hard disks,
go to next column.
 Mark Format integrated one or Format exter-
nal one,
confirm.
A warning note will be displayed.
OKPress at least for three seconds to start format-
ting.
Or:
BACK: Cancel procedure
Never ever switch off the TV set during a formatting
process.
After the formatting, a message will appear on the
screen showing the results of the formatting and tips
on how to resolve any problems that exist, should there
be any.
After the formatting the TV set must be switched
off and on again.
Note on formatting external USB disks:
The TV set supports the two hard disk file systems FAT 32 and NTFS.
External hard disks are formatted by the TV in the FAT32 file system
to full capacity.
With FAT32, the maximum size of a file is 4 GB.
For a parallel use of TV and PC, we recommend that you reformat
the hard disk on a PC to NTFS.
...
Hard disks
Ch
ec
k
i
n
t
e-
grated one
Format
external one
CAUTION
do you really want to
format the integrated
hard drive?
Formatting deletes all the
data on the hard
drive.
To start formatting, hold
down the button for
at least three seconds.
OK
If problems should occur when operating the
integrated hard drive, it may be possible to
eliminate these by formatting the hard drive.
However, please note that all of the data on the
storage medium will be deleted in the process.
This also affects the station logos that are stored
on the hard drive. If the TV is not connected to
the Internet, station logos will no longer be
available to you in the future.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
97
Export log file
To resolve problems, a log file can be provided for the service. The log
file can be exported to a USB storage device or manually or automa-
tically transferred via the Internet.
The log file can be transferred via the Internet only when an online
connection exists. The transferred data is anonymous and purely of
technical nature without reference to person, location or IP address.
Browser history or login details are not stored or transferred.
Call export of the log file
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Control,
go to next column.
 Mark more ...,
call other settings.
 Mark Export log file,
go to next column.
 Select I agree, if you accept the privacy
policies,
OK Confirm selection.
 Select Via Internet, Via USB or Settings.
When selecting Via Internet:
 Mark Export log files now,
OK confirm selection.
This transfers all stored log files to the Loewe
server.
After successful transmission, a reference
number will be displayed that you can specify as
a reference when making inquiries.
...
Confirm with
OK
Back
I agree
I don't agree
Export log
file
Dear Sir or Madam,
For securing our quality standards and for statistical analysis your device
transmits technical data to our server.
This data is anonymous and of a technical nature without reference to
person, location or IP address.
All data will be deleted from our servers not later than 4 weeks.
More information can be found in our privacy policy.
(https://www.loewe.tv/uk/service/datenschutz.html)
Export log file
...
Back
Export log
file
Export
Unmount
Here you can export the log file existing in the system. This one can be
provided to the service for troubleshooting.
Before you remove the USB storage again, you need to safely
disconnect it with “Unmount” from the TV set to prevent data loss.
Target USB1
Via Internet Via USB Settings
Export log file
When selecting Via USB:
 Select a target if several USB storage media
are available.
 Mark Export,
OK confirm selection.
Before you remove the USB storage again, you need
to safely disconnect it with Unmount from the TV
set to prevent data loss.
When selecting Settings:
 Mark the desired setting.
Autom.
Export
Herewith you enable/disable the automatic export
of the problem file as soon as a problem situation
has occurred.
When set to on, the file is automatically transferred
to the Loewe server and stored as soon as a problem
situation has occurred.
...
Back
Export log
file
Export log file
Hereby you enable/disable the automatic export of the problem file as
soon as a problem situation has occurred. The file is transferred to the
Loewe server and stored there.
Autom. export on off
Via Internet Via USB Settings
System settings
Control
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
98
Network settings
Under Network settings you make settings to your network adaptors
and the various types of media.
Call network settings
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Multimedia / Network,
go to next column.
 Mark Network settings,
go to next column.
 Select desired menu item,
go to next column.
Explanations of the setting options in the network menu:
Networking
Here, the network wizard starts that guides you
through all necessary settings to your network (see
right hand column).
Host name
Give your TV set a name so that it can be uniquely
identified in the network.
Proxy server
Do the settings for using a proxy server. The proxy
server wizard will be called.
See chapter System settings, section Multimedia
/ Network – Proxy server for further information.
Wake on
LAN/WiFi
Here you can specify whether it is permitted to
access your TV set by LAN/WLAN in standby mode.
This allows you to switch on your TV, for example.
Please note that the TV set consequently uses more
power in standby mode.
After switching off the TV set into standby mode,
it takes minimum 30 seconds for the TV set to
be ready for reception of a signal (Wake on LAN/
WLAN) to power on via LAN/WLAN.
If you want to switch on your TV set via the Loewe
App by Wake on WLAN, you have to configure in
your router‘s encryption permanently on WPA2.
Setting WPA / WPA2 may not be used.
...
Network
settings
Networking
The following antenna wizard guides you through all the
necessary settings relevant to your network.
Host name
Proxy server
Wake on
LAN/WiFi
Network
The network wizard guides you through all the necessary settings
relevant to your network
At the beginning you see the current network status.
Proceed to next step.
Proceed to next step.
 Select network mode.
Select how you want to connect your TV set to
your network.
OK Confirm selection.
Off
Deactivates all existing network adaptors of your
TV set.
On, wired
only
Access to the network only via a network cable.
The wireless access is deactivated.
On, wireless
only
Access to the network only via WLAN.
The access via a network cable is deactivated.
Depending on which type of network (wireless or wired)
was selected, the appropriate settings appear below.
Network
status
.
...
Networking
NETWORK WIZARD - Network status
Proceed with
Current settings:
Networking Wired
IP configuration Automatic
Additional information:
IP address 172.16.10.141
Subnet mask 255.255.0.0
Gateway 172.16.0.1
DNS server 1 172.16.0.1
DNS server 2 192.168.1.1
MAC address 18:16:0f:71:af:92
End with
Security hint
.
...
Networking
This next step allows you to connect your TV device to the Internet. This enables
you to use of a number of different services and get the most out of your
device’s technical capabilities.
For data protection reasons, we would like to point out that once the device is
connected to the Internet data will be transferred between your TV device and
the Internet as this is a prerequisite for use. As a result, your TV device is subject
to the same risks and dangers as any other device with Internet capabilities, e.g.
computer, smartphone, etc.
In this respect, Loewe guarantees that this data will not be personally exploited
in any way. However, a statistical analysis of anonymised data records may be
carried out. If you have any questions, please contact your dedicated Loewe
advisor or call the Loewe Hotline.
Internet Security hint
Back with Proceed with
Network
mode
.
...
Networking
Please select the desired network mode from the list or switch it off completely.
Off
On, wired only
On, wireless only
Select network mode
Back with
Proceed with
System settings
Multimedia / Network
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
99
System settings
Multimedia / Network
Configuration of the built-in LAN adaptor
As network operation was selected On, wired only.
 Select type of IP configuration.
automatic
Automatic configuration of the IP address via DHCP
server or via multiple protocols according to UPnP
specification (including DHCP).
After selecting IP configuration – automatic
proceed to the network status.
manual
Enter your fixed IP addresses manually.
If manual has been selected under IP configuration:
 Enter IP, Subnet mask, Gateway and DNS server
addresses in succession with the numerical keys
on the remote control.
Proceed to network status.
You see the current network status again.
BACK: End of wizard.
IP
configuration
.
...
Networking
You can define the necessary parameters for the IP configuration yourself
("manual") or set this to be done automatically. The automatic setting occurs
through a DHCP server or by means of several protocols in accordance with the
"Universal Plug and Play" specification (UPnP)."
IP configuration
Back with Proceed with
Automatic Manual
.
...
IP address 192.168.000.123
Subnet mask 255.255.255.000
Gateway 192.168.000.100
DNS server 1 192.168.000.010
DNS server 2 192.168.001.010
Back with Proceed with
Networking
Manual IP configuration
Please specify the static IP address of the network adapter.
Manual IP-
configuration
Network
status
.
...
Networking
NETWORK WIZARD - Network status
Proceed with
Current settings:
Networking Wired
IP configuration Automatic
Additional information:
IP address 172.16.10.141
Subnet mask 255.255.0.0
Gateway 172.16.0.1
DNS server 1 172.16.0.1
DNS server 2 192.168.1.1
MAC address 18:16:0f:71:af:92
End with
Configuration of the built-in WLAN bridge adaptor
As network operation was selected On, wireless only.
The TV set now searches for wireless routers.
After the end of the search:
 Select a base station to which the TV shall be
connected.
OK Confirm selection and proceed to the entry of the
Wi-Fi password.
If the desired access point is not found:
 Mark Search again,
OK repeat search for wireless routers.
Or:
 Mark Enter access point manually,
OK
enter manually the SSID of the desired access
point, e.g., when the SSID of the access point is
not transferred
.
The TV set automatically detects the type of encryption
used and informs you. You will find the supported
encryption types in chapter Technical data.
If your wireless network is not encrypted: Proceed to
IP configuration.
Proceed to password entry.
Enter WLAN password.
In case of an unknown WLAN key, contact your
network administrator.
For WEP encryption
 Select the WEP index,
OK proceed to IP configuration.
 Select type of IP configuration.
For the further workflow of the network wizard
see left column under IP configuration.
Access point
selection
.
...
Networking
Please choose the access point to which the TV should connect.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the button.
Access point selection
Search again Enter access point manually
OK
FritzBox 7490
Netgear
Router ABC
Back with Proceed with
WPA
passphrase
.
...
Networking
The selected base station uses WPA encryption, for which a password consisting
of between 8 and 64 characters is required. Please insert it in the dialogue
below.
WPA passphrase
Back with Proceed with
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
100
System settings
Multimedia / Network
Explanation of the settings in the network status:
Network
shows the current type of connection (wireless or
wired).
IP
configuration
The current assignment method for the IP address
of your TV set (automatic or manual).
IP address
Your current IP address.
Subnet mask
Your current subnet-mask IP address.
Gateway
The IP address of your gateway.
DNS server 1
Your current first DNS server IP address.
DNS server 2
Your current second DNS server IP address.
Network
SSID
(for wireless connection only)
The name of your network.
MAC address
(TV)
(for wired connection only)
Indicates the MAC address that is built into the hard-
ware of your TV set’s wired network adaptor (LAN).
MAC address
(WLAN)
(for wireless connection only)
Indicates the MAC address that is built into the
hardware of your TV set’s wireless network adaptor
(WLAN).
Connection
status
Gives you information about the current status of
your wireless connection (save settings, connecting,
login failed, access point not found, not connected,
connection established).
Link
quality
Specifies the signal strength as a percentage.
Proxy server
In the proxy server wizard you make arrangements for your TV set for
a connection with a home network with proxy server.
A proxy server is not necessary for most home networks.
Contact your home network administrator if you are unclear about
the proxy server settings.
Specify if a Proxy server is used in your home network.
 Mark Use or Don’t use,
The following settings will only be requested after
the selection of Use.
Proceed to next step.
Proceed to entry of the proxy server name.
Specify the name or IP address of the proxy server
used.
Proceed to next step.
Proceed to entry of the proxy port number.
Specify the network port number of the proxy server.
Proceed to next step.
Specify whether your proxy server requires a special
login.
 Mark No login or Login necessary,
Proceed to next step.
Enter your login data for the proxy server.
User name and password are requested only after
selecting Proxy server login.
Use proxy
server
.
...
Proxy server
Here you can choose whether to use a proxy server for network access or not.
Most home-networks work without a proxy server.
Proxy server - Use proxy server
Proceed with End with
Don‘t use Use
Proxy server
name
.
...
Proxy server
In the following dialogue, please enter the proxy server's name or IP address.
Proxy server name
Back with Proceed with
Proxy port
number
.
...
Proxy server
Please specify the proxy server's port number in the following dialogue.
Proxy port number
Back with Proceed with
Proxy server
login
.
...
Proxy server
Here you can specify whether the indicated proxy server requires you to log in
with a username and password.
Proxy server login
Proceed withBack with
No login Login necessary
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
101
System settings
Multimedia / Network
Multimedia settings
Under this menu item you find further settings for Audio, Video and
Photo.
Calling the Multimedia settings menu
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Multimedia / Network,
go to next column.
 Mark Multimedia settings,
go to next column.
 Select desired settings.
Explanations of the setting options in the Multimedia settings
menu:
Auto return
to music
player
The music player will reappear whenever another
dialogue, e.g., music selection is called during
playback, and no keys are pressed for the set time
period.
You can specify if and after which time the music
player reappears (selection options are No, After
1 min, After 5 min).
...
Multimedia
settings
When navigating through the files if you pause in this view
you can input whether and when the view should
automatically return to the player.
Renderer
Here you can allow external devices to access your TV set (renderer)
via app to render (play back) contents there.
Call up renderer menu
Default setting: on
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Multimedia / Network,
go to next column.
 Mark Renderer,
go to next column.
 Select the setting on or off.
...
Renderer
on
off
You can allow external devices here and access your TV
(renderer) via an app to play content there.
Home Automation
You will find your Home Network settings under this menu item.
Call up home automation menu
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Multimedia / Network,
go to next column.
 Mark Home Automation,
go to next column.
Explanation of the setting options in the Home Automation
menu:
Send SDDP-
identification
Here you can assign an ID to the SDDP (Sim-
ple Device Discovery Protocol) in your Home
Network. By doing this your TV set can be
displayed in the device list of your Home Au-
tomation Server.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
102
Mobile Recording
Mobile recording enables you to program recordings on your TV from
far away.
Basically, the function is based on a simple e-mail correspondence. If
the mobile recording function is activated and set, the TV set scans
an e-mail account at regular intervals.
If a record command is sent by the Loewe app, this command reaches
a connecting server.
From here, a short text email is sent to the appropriate email account.
The TV set can receive this information and program / start a recording
accordingly.
You can download the Loewe app for free for iOS and Android in
the appropriate app store.
The TV set must not be switched off using the power switch,
otherwise the email mailbox can not be scanned.
The TV set must be connected to the Internet.
The programmed timer recordings of the Mobile Recording function
are handled by the TV set with highest priority.
If at this time other recordings are programmed for the same
recording period, they will be overwritten by the new recording or
parts of the recording cut off.
Open settings for Mobile Recording
HOME: Call Home view.
 Select System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Select Multimedia / Network,
go to next column.
 Select Mobile Recording,
OK call.
The Mobile Recording wizard is started.
 Select yes for Function enabled.
 Select Configure email account
ט
Auto-
matic / Manual.
When selecting Configure email account טManual,
enter your own settings for personal mailbox account
(see right column).
When selecting Configure email account טAuto-
matic, the system mailbox will be used. In the next step,
the TV set displays the email address and the security
PIN of the system mailbox.
Continue until the setting of scanning times.
 Carry out settings.
Settings of scanning times
When the TV set is in standby mode, you can determine the times at
which the TV automatically checks the defined mailbox for remote
programming.
If the TV set is switched on or in the Quick Start mode, a fixed
inspection interval of 10 minutes applies permanently.
Scanning
period
Here you can specify the period during which the TV
set checks the email account.
Inspection
interval
Here you can specify the time interval at which the
TV set checks the email account in the specified
period.
Start/end of
the scanning
period
Here, the start and end times are displayed
depending on the scanning period.
If you wish to enter start / end of the scanning
period individually, you must select user defined
for scanning period.
In the last step it is checked whether the email account is accessible
with the set data.
On successful test the configuration is completed.
Settings of personal email account
If the mailbox defined by the system was selected as the default email
account, the account is automatically created on the server. You do
not need to make further settings.
When selecting Configure email account טManual you need to
adjust the factory defaults and enter the settings of your existing
personal email account.
You will find the necessary parameters in the menu dialogues Settings/
Options of your email programme you are using (e.g. Outlook,
Thunderbird) or from the relevant provider of your email accounts.
Default settings page 1:
Email address: tv-xxxxxxxxxxx@loewe-dialogue.com
Account type: POP3 or (IMAP)
Incoming mail server: mail.loewe-dialogue.com
Outgoing mail server (SMTP): mail.loewe-dialogue.com
Username: tv-xxxxxxxxxxx@loewe-dialogue.com
Password: **************
Secure PIN: xxxx
Default settings page 2:
Incoming mail server port: 995 (POP3),0 993 (IMAP)
Incoming encryption: ‘no‘ , ‘SSL’ , ‘StartTSL
Server equires authentification: ‘no‘
Outgoing mail server port:
‘25’ (no), ‘587’ (StartTSL), ‘465’ (SSL)
Outgoing encryption: ‘no‘ , ‘SSL’ , ‘StartTSL
Delete mail from server: ‘no‘
Email account settings Reset
Remote programming via any email client
In case of a manual e-mail account, you can perform the remote
programming of recordings by means of any e-mail client.
The subject line of the email must include the defined four-digit
secure pin, the broadcasting time and the station:
PIN BROADCASTING TIME OF STATION
Example: 1234 20:45 Das Erste HD
1234 8.45 pm Das Erste HD
Timer programming of a broadcast, which runs on the current day
around 20:45 on the tv station Das Erste HD. An exact specification
of start and end time of the programme is not required.
The station name must not be 100% accurate, the name is
compared by means of a certain algorithm. It is advisable, however,
to store the station name as a note in the smartphone.
If the recording time is more than 24 hours in the future, the date
must also be specified in the subject line:
1234 04/09/2014 20:45 Das Erste HD
1234 09/04/2014 8.45 pm Das Erste HD
You will get an e-mail response as confirmation from the TV set to
the address of the manual e-mail account with the current list of
programmed timer recordings.
System settings
Multimedia / Network
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
103
Bluetooth
With the Bluetooth functionality, you can use a wireless connection
between your TV set and a Bluetooth-enabled audio source, such
as smartphone, tablet, etc. and use the TV set as a playback device
(Bluetooth music player).
When pairing a Bluetooth keyboard you can comfortably enter your
characters, e.g. to search for your favourite artists.
The TV set can be connected to several Bluetooth devices. However,
only one active link is possible at the same time.
The distance between your TV set and the Bluetooth device should
not exceed 10 m (line of sight).
Your Bluetooth audio source must support the A2DP standard.
Your Bluetooth Keyboard must support the HID standard.
Calling the Bluetooth function
HOME: Call Home view.
 Select System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Select Multimedia / Network,
go to next column.
Select Bluetooth,
OKcall.
Enable
function
Here you enable the Bluetooth function of your TV
set. Then, the TV set is visible to other Bluetooth
devices.
Default setting: yes.
The search for Bluetooth devices in the nearby area
starts automatically for 2 min.
If Bluetooth devices are available, they are displayed
in a list.
Coupling starting from the TV set
Select required device.
OK Connect the device. Before the connected device
a check mark ۪is set.
In the event that a code is needed, the TV set will
generate a connection PIN. This one must be
entered on the Bluetooth device and confirmed
if required.
Proceed to Bluetooth music player, see right column.
Coupling starting from the Bluetooth device
Enable the Bluetooth function of your audio source.
If necessary, get help from the instruction manual of
your audio source.
If necessary, use the Bluetooth search function of the
audio source. Now, Bluetooth devices will be searched
near the audio source.
Select loewetv_x (device name ex-factory, where x is
a character string).
The device name appearing in Bluetooth search can
be set in the System settings under Multimedia /
NetworkטNetwork settings טHost name.
Proceed to Bluetooth music player, see below.
Confirm the code specified for the coupling. The
Bluetooth device is connected to the TV set.
Proceed to Bluetooth music player, see below
.
Bluetooth Music Player
To use the TV set as a playback device for audio streaming, your
smartphone, tablet (audio source) must be paired with the TV set.
After successful coupling of your audio source, you can start the audio
playback on your audio source.
The sound is played back on the TV set.
For some audio sources, the link must be explicitly enabled before
music playback can be heard from the TV set.
Volume setting on the Bluetooth music player
With the keys V+/V- on the remote control the volume
can be adjusted for the TV set as usual.
According to manufacturer/type of your Bluetooth
device, the volume can be adjusted directly on the
playback device.
If you listen to your music during the Bluetooth
playback with volume 60, then this volume generally
applies also to your TV sound.
It is recommended to set the volume of the audio
source to high values and to adjust the actual volume
of the TV set by means of the remote control unit.
Sending the sound from the TV set to a Bluetooth headset
Your end device must support the A2DP standard.
According to manufacturer/type of your Bluetooth device, the
volume can be adjusted directly on the playback device.
The coupling of the Bluetooth headset is carried out
as described in the left column.
After successful pairing, you will hear the TV sound on
your Bluetooth headset via the wireless connection.
The volume of TV speakers and headphones can be
controlled independently.
System settings
Multimedia / Network
Bluetooth
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
104
Bluetooth Keyboard
To use a Bluetooth keyboard as an input device, it must be coupled
to the TV set.
Bluetooth function menu opened.
Select required device.
OK Connect the device. Before the connected device
a check mark ۪is set.
In the event that a code is needed, the TV set will
generate a connection PIN.
If your Bluetooth
device uses the PIN code 0000, there will be an
automatic connection. If your Bluetooth device
uses a different code,
this must be entered on the
Bluetooth device and also confirmed, if necessary.
After successful pairing, you can simply type all the
characters that can be entered using the on-screen
keyboard or the remote control unit independently
with your Bluetooth keyboard.
Most remote control key functions can be accessed
using the keyboard. An overview of the key assignments
is shown in the table.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
31
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
32
17
Key assignment
No. Remote control Keyboard
1 Sound On/Off key -----
2 TV key Alt + F
3 STB key -----
4 DR+ key Alt + W
5 Favourites key Alt + Z
6 EPG key Alt + E
7 TEXT key Alt + T
8 MENU key Alt + M
9 V+ key -----
10 OK key Enter
11 V– key -----
12 Green key -----
13 Red key -----
14
ܓkey -----
15 RECORD key F5
16 PAUSE key -----
17 STOP key -----
18
ܒkey -----
19 PLAY key -----
20 Blue key F4
21 Yellow key F3
22 Directional keys
 Arrow button
23 P+ key -----
24 BACK key Alt + ESC
25 INFO key Alt + I
26 PIP key -----
27 HOME key Alt + A
28 Number keys 0 ... 9
29 Source key/Sources Alt + H
30 VIDEO key -----
31 AUDIO key Alt + R
32 On/Off key -----
System settings
Multimedia / Network
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
105
System settings
Connections
Connections
Settings for the connection of external appliances are made in this
menu.
The menu item Connections is not available while a timer record-
ing is active.
Calling the connections menu
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Connections,
go to next column.
 Select desired settings.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Connections menu:
Sound
components
The sound components wizard helps you to configure
the components that are used to reproduce the TV
sound.
See chapter System settings, section Connections
– Sound components for further information.
Antenna DVB
Here you can set the parameters of the DVB-T and
the DVB-S antenna with the antenna wizard.
See chapter System settings, section Connections
– Antenna DVB for further information.
AV
connecting
settings
In the AV connecting settings the parameters for the
AV connection socket can be adapted.
See chapter System settings, section Connections
AV connecting settings for further information.
Digital Link
All settings for Digital Link are made here.
See chapter System settings, section Connections
– Digital Link for further information.
HDMI
Here you can set the modes for the individual HDMI
connections. Here you will also find the gaming mode.
See chapter System settings, section Connec-
tions – Gaming mode for further information.
Connections
Sound com-
ponents
Antenna
DVB
AV connect-
ing settings
A wizard guides you step by step through the
configuration of your sound reproduction components.
Digital Link
Gaming
mode
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
106
System settings
Connections
Sound components
The sound components wizard helps you to configure the components
that are used to reproduce the TV sound. For sound reproduction, you
can configure the TV loudspeakers, active loudspeakers, loudspeaker
systems as well as analogue and digital HiFi/AV amplifiers.
Your TV set is equipped with an integrated digital multi-channel
audio decoder. Sound signals with up to six channels (5.1 surround
sound) can be emitted through the DIGITAL AUDIO LINK interface,
irrespective of whether the sound signal comes from an external device
(DVD player, Blu-ray player) or from a DVB station.
For sound formats supported by the digital audio decoder, see chapter
Technical data.
Calling the sound components wizard
For information on navigation within the wizard, see chapter General
information on menu operation.
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Select Connections,
go to next column.
 Select Sound components,
go to next column.
 Select Sound component.
For selectable items see right hand column.
OK Confirm selection.
Proceed to next step.
...
...
Sound com-
ponents
SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD - Sound playback via ...
Proceed with End with
Please specify here via which sound components you want to listen to your
TV sound.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the button.
OK
TV speakers
Speaker system (AUDIO OUT)
Speaker system (DIGITAL AUDIO LINK)
HiFi/AV amplifier
HiFi/AV amplifier or TV speakers (switchable)
Sound playback via ...
Some sound components can only be selected when the respective
device is connected to the TV set.
TV
speakers
Sound reproduction via the built-in TV speakers
(factory setting).
With the selection of TV speakers the wizard will end.
Speaker
system
(AUDIO OUT)
Sound reproduction via a loudspeaker system or
active loudspeakers (connection to AUDIO OUT).
How to connect a speaker system to AUDIO OUT,
see chapter External devices, section Connecting
the speaker system (AUDIO OUT).
How to configure a speaker system at AUDIO OUT,
see chapter System settings, section Connctions
Adjusting the speaker system (AUDIO OUT).
If a speaker system is connected to AUDIO OUT
and you want to return to selecting TV speakers,
switch the subwoofer of the speaker system off
before you select the TV speakers. At the AUDIO
OUT connection, the audio signal is output with
maximum volume setting in the TV speaker
selection.
Speaker
system
(DIGITAL
AUDIO LINK)
Sound reproduction via a loudspeaker system or
active loudspeakers (connection to DIGITAL AUDIO
LINK).
How to connect a speaker system to DIGITAL AUDIO
LINK, see chapter External devices, section
Connecting the speaker system (DAL).
How to connect active speakers to DIGITAL AUDIO
LINK, see chapter External devices, section
Connecting active loudspeakers (DAL).
How to configure a speaker system at DIGITAL AUDIO
LINK
, see chapter System settings, section
Connections – Adjusting the speaker system
(DAL).
HiFi/AV
amplifier
Sound reproduction via an external analogue or
digital audio amplifier.
How you connect a HiFi/AV amplifier see chapter
External devices, section Connecting the HiFi/
AV amplifier.
How you configure a HiFi/AV amplifier see chapter
System settings, section Connections –
Adjusting the HiFi/AV amplifier.
HiFi/AV
amplifier or
TV speakers
(switchable)
Sound reproduction optionally via an external
analogue or digital audio amplifier or via the built-in
TV loudspeakers.
The selection options for switching between
sound components can be called via the function
list under Sound settings.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
107
Adjusting the speaker system (AUDIO OUT)
Sound playback via ... – Speaker system (AUDIO OUT)
Enter here that you want to hear the TV sound via a speaker system
connected to AUDIO OUT.
For information on navigation within the wizard, see chapter General
information on menu operation.
Speaker system (AUDIO OUT) was selected in the Sound
components wizard. Afterwards you can switch on the power switch
of the subwoofer.
 Select TV speakers + Subwoofer or Subwoofer
+ ext. front speakers.
Specify here whether you want to operate the
speakers of the TV set with an additional
subwoofer or a subwoofer with external front
speakers at the AUDIO OUT socket of the TV set.
Continue with the appropriate selection.
TV speakers + Subwoofer
Adjust the volume for the subwoofer.
Back: Finish wizard.
This ends the sound components wizard for connecting
and setting up a speakers system.
...
Sound com-
ponents
Connect speakers
Please specify here whether you are using the
TV speakers with an additional subwoofer or if
you wish to connect a subwoofer + external
front speakers. (AUDIO OUT socket).
TV speakers + Subwoofer Subwoofer + ext. front speakers
Proceed withBack with
0dB
TV TV
Connect
speakers
-12 dB +2 dB +12 dB
TV TV
2dB
...
Sound com-
ponents
Adjust subwoofer level
You can adapt the volume of the subwoofer
optimally to the TV volume.
Level
Back with
Finish wizard with
Adjust
subwoofer
level
Subwoofer + ext. front speakers
 Select yes here if you want to use the built-in TV
speakers as centre speakers.
If you select no here, the external front speakers
also transmit the centre sound parts additionally.
Proceed to
Adjust ext. Speakers level
.
Adjust the volume of the ext. sound system
optimally to the TV volume.
An audio broadband signal is transmitted via
the AUDIO OUT jack. Therefore, the level of the
front speakers and the subwoofer varies
uniformly with the volume setting.
Back: Finish wizard.
This ends the sound components wizard for connecting
and setting up a speakers system.
...
Sound com-
ponents
TV loudspeakers as centre speaker
Please specify whether you want to use your
built-in TV speakers as active centre speakers of
your multi-channel speaker system.
no yes
Proceed withBack with
0dB
TV
0dB
0dB
TV
loudspeakers
as centre
speaker
-12 dB +3 dB +12 dB
3dB
TV
3dB
3dB
...
Sound com-
ponents
Adjust ext. Speakers level
Here you can optimally adjust the volume of
the external sound system to the TV's volume.
Back with
Finish wizard with
Adjust ext.
Speakers
level
System settings
Connections
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
108
System settings
Connections
continued on the next page
p
Adjusting the speaker system (DAL)
Sound playback via ... – Speaker system (DIGITAL AUDIO LINK)
Enter here that you want to hear the TV sound via a speaker system
connected to Digital Audio Link. If you connect active speakers, please
use the setting Speaker system (DIGITAL AUDIO LINK).
For information on navigation within the wizard see chapter General
information on menu operation.
When setting up the speaker system for the first time, the
configuration starts with the step
Connect front speakers
.
Speaker system (DIGITAL AUDIO LINK) was selected in the Sound
components wizard.
If you want to set up or change a speaker system:
 Select Configuration/modification.
If nothing has been set yet, the factory settings
or otherwise the last set values are displayed.
OK Confirm selection.
 Select Complete.
OK Confirm selection.
Proceed
to connect and set the front speakers.
 Select External speakers or TV speakers.
For External speaker go to the frequency bar
below and
set the lower limit frequency of the external
front speakers in steps of 10 Hz.
0dB 0dB
100Hz 90Hz 100Hz
100Hz 100Hz
0dB
0dB 0dB
4,0m 3,0m 4,0m
2,0m 2,0m
3,9m
0dB
...
Sound com-
ponents
Speaker system
Please specify whether you want to change the illustrated setting of your
speaker system or whether all existing settings are to be reset to the values
of the delivery state.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the
button.
Back with
Components Distances Level
Configuration/modification Reset to factory settings
OK
Configuration/
modification
Configuration/
modification
...
Sound com-
ponents
Configuration/modification of speaker system
Please specify here whether you wish to fully set up a speaker system for
the first time or wish to completely modify an existing one or whether you
wish to restrict yourself to changing the speaker connections, changing
the distances of the speakers from the listening position or altering the
individual volume levels.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the
button.
End withBack with
Complete
Connections only
Distances only
Levels only
OK
100Hz 100Hz 100Hz
100Hz 100Hz
...
Sound com-
ponents
Connect front speakers
Please specify here whether you wish to use
the TV speakers or external front speakers as
front speakers. In the latter case, their lower
limit frequency must be entered in Hz (see
instruction manual and technical data of the
speakers).
Proceed withBack with
TV speakers External speakers
20 Hz 100 Hz 200 Hz
Connect
front
speakers
Select the start value of the frequency response of
the speakers for the correct setting (e.g., 50Hz for
the specification “Frequency response
50-20,000Hz”). See the technical data of the speak-
ers for the value.
You can replace the external front speakers by the
TV speakers if necessary. In this case, TV speakers.
Then, the TV speakers transmit the sound of the
front speakers.
Proceed to connect and set the surround speakers.
 Select yes or no for the external surround speakers.
In case, external speakers were chosen as surround
speakers:
Select frequency bar
set the lower limit frequency of the surround
speakers in 10 Hz steps.
Select the start value of the frequency response of
the speakers for the correct setting.
Proceed to
connect and set the centre speaker.
 Select whether the TV speakers or an External
speaker is to reproduce the centre sound or no
if no centre speaker is connected.
If no centre speaker is connected, the front speakers
also transmit the centre sound parts additionally.
For External speaker go to the frequency bar
below and
set the Lower Limit Frequency of the external
front speakers in steps of 10 Hz.
Select the start value of the frequency response of
the speakers for the correct setting.
Proceed to
connect the Subwoofer.
100Hz
100Hz
100Hz 100Hz
100Hz
...
Sound com-
ponents
Connect surround speakers
Please specify here whether you want to
connect external surround speakers. In this
case, their lower limit frequency must be
entered in Hz (see instruction manual and
technical data of the speakers).
no yes
20 Hz 100 Hz 200 Hz
Proceed withBack with
Connect
surround
speakers
...
Sound com-
ponents
Connect centre speaker
Please specify here whether you wish to use a
centre speaker. This function can be fulfilled by
the TV speakers, if they are not used as front
speakers, or by an external speaker. In the
latter case, its lower limit frequency must be
entered in Hz (see instruction manual and
technical data of the speakers).
no TV speakers External speaker
Proceed withBack with
100Hz 90Hz
100Hz
100Hz 100Hz
Connect
centre
speaker
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
109
System settings
Connections
 Select yes or no for Subwoofer.
If no subwoofer is connected, the front speakers
additionally transmit the sound parts intended for
the subwoofer as far as possible.
Proceed to Distance to left hand front speaker.
Set the distance between the left front speaker
and your listening position in 10 cm steps.
Measure the distances from your listening position
to the front, surround, and centre speakers
respectively. The digital audio decoder calculates
delay times from this for the loudspeaker signals,
so that these reach the listener simultaneously.
 Proceed to the respective other speakers (right
front speaker, left surround speaker, right
surround speaker, centre speaker and subwoofer)
and also
 The selected speaker will be coloured blue.
After setting the distance to the subwoofer.
Proceed to Adjust speaker level.
100Hz 90Hz 100Hz
100Hz 100Hz
...
Sound com-
ponents
Connect subwoofer
Please specify here whether you want to
additionally connect a subwoofer for very
good bass reproduction.
no yes
Proceed withBack with
Connect
subwoofer
4,0m 3,0m
4,0m
2,0m 2,0m
3,9m
0.1 m 4.0 m 10.0 m
...
Sound com-
ponents
Distance to left front speaker
Please enter the distance of the left front
speaker from your listening position here.
Proceed withBack with
Distance to
left front
speaker
Adjust the volume for the speaker.
Proceed to next speaker or
 select speakers manually.
For balanced audio reproduction all speakers should
be set to the same volume level. A noise signal will
be reproduced automatically on each speaker in
succession. Adjust every speaker to equal perceived
volume from your listening position. The selected
speaker will be coloured blue.
After adjustment of the last speaker.
Proceed to Subwoofer phase.
Switch a station or a DVD player playing music to music
playback.
Test both values ( and 180º) and select the one
with which you get a clearer bass reproduction
from your listening position.
Back: Finish wizard.
This ends the sound components wizard for connecting
and setting up a speakers system.
0dB 0dB
0dB
0dB 0dB
0dB
-12 dB 0 dB +12 dB
...
Sound com-
ponents
Adjust speaker level
You hear a sound from every speaker one after
another. But you can also select the speakers
manually with the menu control buttons
up/down. Set the volume for the respectively
active speaker shown in blue so that you get
approximately the same volume impression
from all the speakers.
Proceed withBack with
Adjust
speaker level
...
Sound com-
ponents
Subwoofer phase
Here you can reverse the phase of your subwoofer. Test both values in
music reproduction and then select the one with which you get a better
bass reproduction.
Finish wizard with
Back with
180°
Subwoofer
phase
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
110
System settings
Connections
Adjusting the HiFi/AV amplifier
Sound playback via ... - HiFi/AV amplifier
The sound components wizard permits configuration of different
audio amplifiers (stereo amplifiers, surround amplifiers, analogue or
digital) with different digital audio formats (Dolby Digital, dts, MPEG,
and stereo/PCM). See the user guide of the audio amplifier for more
information.
For information on navigation within the wizard see
chapter General information on menu operation.
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Select Connections,
go to next column.
 Select Sound components,
Call sound components wizard.
Mark HiFi/AV amplifier or HiFi/AV amplifier or
TV speakers (switchable),
OK Confirm selection.
HiFi/AV
amplifier
Select setting when an amplifier is connected and
the TV speakers are not used.
HiFi/AV
amplifier or
TV speakers
(switchable)
Select setting when an amplifier is connected and
the TV speakers are used. In the sound mode
selection the audio reproduction can then be
switched between the amplifier and the TV speakers.
Proceed to next step.
Select whether the sound is to be transmitted
digitally or analogue to the the amplifier (see right
hand column):
digital: Proceed to Sound formats.
analogue: proceed with Finish wizard.
...
...
Sound com-
ponents
SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD - Sound playback via ...
Proceed with End with
Please specify here via which sound components you want to listen to your
TV sound.
Note: The newly selected parameter must be confirmed with the button.
TV speakers
Speaker system (AUDIO OUT)
Speaker system (DIGITAL AUDIO LINK)
HiFi/AV amplifier
HiFi/AV amplifier or TV speakers (switchable)
OK
Sound
reproduction
via ...
...
Sound com-
ponents
Type of sound transmission
Please select whether the TV sound signal should be transmitted to the
HiFi/AV amplifier by a digital (via the SPDIF OUT) or analogue (via the AUDIO
OUT/HEADPHONE) signal
digital analogue
Finish wizard withBack with
Type of sound
transmission
Select sound formats which can be decoded with
the digital amplifier (see operating manual of the
used amplifier).
OK adopt sound formats.
Back: Finish wizard.
Sound
formats
...
Sound com-
ponents
Stereo (PCM)
dts
MPEG
Dolby Digital
Stereo (PCM)
Sound formats
Please specify, what kind of sound formats can be processed by your
HiFi/AV amplifier and mark them by the button .
Back with
OK
Finish wizard with
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
111
System settings
Connections
Antenna DVB
Here you can make settings for the DVB-T antenna and call the antenna
wizard for the DVB-S antenna.
Call Antenna DVB
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Connections,
go to next column.
 Mark Antenna DVB,
go to next column.
 Select the desired setting,
 call.
Explanations of the setting options in the antenna DVB menu:
Antenna
DVB-S
Here the antenna wizard starts guiding you through
all the settings relevant to the DVB-S antenna. The
settings of the DVB-S antenna wizard are explained
in the procedure of initial installation.
Antenna
DVB-T
Here you can set whether your DVB-T antenna needs
a supply voltage.
Antennas with an integrated amplifier need a supply
voltage on the antenna line. In this case, select
Supply voltage 5V and confirm with OK.
Otherwise, select No supply voltage and confirm
also with OK.
Positioning/aligning DVB-T antenna
If you are receiving one or more DVB-T stations with picture and sound
interference then you should change the installation location and align-
ment of the antenna. Find out online which channels are broadcasting
the DVB-T stations in your region.
A DVB-T station is received and selected.
Calling manual search (see chapter System settings, section Stations
– Manual TV/Radio scan).
Due to the preset stations, the signal source is already selected as
DVB-T. Position and align the antenna so that maximum C/N values
and levels are reached.
Search for DVB-T stations one after the other and compare values for
C/N and Level. Then position/align the antenna to the weakest station
so that maximum values for C/N and Level are obtained. The value
for BER should be as low as possible.
Thereafter, perform an automatic search for all DVB-T stations.
...
Antenna DVB
Antenna
DVB-S
Antenna
DVB-T
The following antenna wizard guides you through all the
necessary settings relevant to your antenna system.
AV connection settings
In the AV connection settings menu the parameters for the AV
connection socket can be adapted.
Calling the connections menu
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Connections,
go to next column.
 Mark AV connecting settings,
go to next column.
 Select the desired setting,
call.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the AV connecting settings
menu:
Device at
connection
AV
Indicate here whether a set and, if yes, which one is
connected to the AV socket.
Signal type
You set the signal type of the device connected to AV
here. You can find out more from your dealer.
Allow
switching
voltage
If this function is activated, the video and audio of an
external unit connected to the AV connector (not at
AVS) will immediately be reproduced on all TV broad-
cast sites when playback is started up, provided that
the external unit supplies a switching voltage.
...
AV connect-
ing settings
Signal type
Please input whether a device is connected to the AV
socket and if so, which device.
Allow switch-
ing voltage
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
112
System settings
Connections
Digital Link
In the digital link menu you make further setting for comfortably linking
external devices to the TV set.
Call Digital Recorder Link menu
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Connections,
go to next column.
 Mark Digital Link,
OK call Digital Link.
 Select the desired setting,
 call.
Explanations of the setting options in the Digital Link menu:
Digital Link
HD
functionality
Herewith you can allow or forbid the automatic
communication between the TV set and linked
external devices (e.g., BluRay player). Among other
things, it's role is that these devices switch mutually
on and off.
Remote
switch on of
the TV set
Here you can select whether the TV set is to switch
on automatically from Standby mode, if Digital Link
HD or Digital Link Plus capable devices connected
to an HDMI or to AV inputs start playback or display
a screen menu.
Menu item only available if at Digital Link HD -
Functionality ט on has been selected.
Shutdown of
the ext.
device via TV
button
You can select here whether the external Digital Link
HD device that is currently playing back should be
automatically shut down as soon as you switch back
to the TV or another AV channel.
Menu item only available if at Digital Link HD -
Functionality ט on has been selected.
...
Digital Link
Thus you can permit (on) or prohibit (off) automatic
communication between the TV set and external devices
connected to it (e.g. BluRay player) via the HDMI cable. One
of its functions is to switch these devices on and off
alternately.
Digital Link
Remote
Shutdown
HDMI
In the HDMI menu, you can make additional settings for the HDMI
connections.
Call HDMI menu
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Connections,
go to next column.
 Mark HDMI,
OK call HDMI.
 Select the desired setting,
call.
Explanations of the setting options in the HDMI menu:
Gaming
mode
For the inputs of your TV set on which game consoles,
PC applications or even Karaoke machines are
operated, we recommend you to activate the
Gaming mode.
Your activities are then displayed quicker on the
screen by reducing the complex picture improving
techniques.
This mode can be set separately for every input of
your TV set.
You can recognise AV connections with set Gaming
mode by the symbol
after the connection name.
A dice icon
is shown in the extended station list
behind the corresponding AV input when filtering on
the AV list.
Compatible
mode
In this menu item you can activate the “compatible
mode”. It optimizes communication with older HDMI
devices. For the use of the latest generation of HDMI
devices, please deactivate the mode.
HDMI1-ARC
Sound format
Here, you can set whether the TV audio signal is
always available as a PCM (2-channel) or in the best
possible sound format (optimal) for the connected
device at the HDMI 1 socket.
...
HDMI
For the inputs of your TV set on which game consoles,
PC applications or even Karaoke machines are
operated, we recommend you to activate the "Gaming
mode". Your activities are then displayed quicker on
the screen by reducing the complex, picture improving
techniques. This mode can be set separately for every
input of your TV set.
Gaming
mode
Compatible
mode
HDMI1-ARC
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
113
Extras
Extras contains additional functions and settings (e.g., Integrated
features, Repeat initial installation, CA module settings).
Call Extras
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Extras,
go to next column.
 Select the desired setting,
 call.
Explanation of the subitems of Extras
DR+
Streaming
Switch off the TV set to be in an advanced standby
mode (server function, see column on right hand
side).
Integrated
features
Call information on the integrated features of the TV
set (see next page).
Repeat initial
installation
You can repeat the Initial installation again at any
time. You are guided through the various menus
where i.a. an automatic TV/radio station search is
automatically carried out.
Caution: All stored stations and all created personal
lists will be deleted by this!
If a parental lock is activated, the access code must
be entered before repeating initial installation.
Reset to
factory
settings
Resetting various settings to their factory defaults
(see next page).
CA module
[Name]
Make settings for your CA modules.
This menu item appears only it at least one CA
module is plugged in.
The exact designation of the menu item and
available subitems depends on your CA module(s).
See chapter System settings, section Extras – CA
module for further information.
Extras
By activating this function you can make your TV set
available to other LOEWE TVs that are set up for this for a
specified period of time (can be configured using the digital
recorder menu item "System settings -> Control -> more ->
DR+ -> DR+ Streaming -> DR+ standby").
DR+
Streaming
Repeat ini-
tial installatio
Integrated
features
Reset to
factory settin
DR+ Streaming
(1
By switching off an accessible TV set ends access to its DR+ archive
in the network.
You can, however, switch your TV set to an advanced standby mode
to enable access to the DR+ archive even when the TV set is switched
off (server function).
Call DR+ Streaming
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Extras,
go to next column.
 Mark DR+ Streaming,
OK confirm.
The TV set will switch to the advanced standby mode.
The DR+ archive will now be accessible within the
network for the period set in the DR+ Streaming -
Settings.
You find the setting of the period under System
settings ט Control ט more ... ט DR+ ט DR+
Streaming ט DR+ Bereitschaft.
After the preset time has elapsed, the TV set switches
to „normal“ standby mode.
DR+ Streaming
Extras
DR+
Streaming
Repeat ini-
tial installatio
Integrated
features
Reset to
factory settin
Your TV set will switch
into a specific standby-
mode, whereby its DR+
archive will be
accessible to other
LOEWE TVs that are set
up for this. From this
point, these devices can
access your set 2 hour(s)
over your home
network.
Cancel
System settings
Extras
(1
Function not available with bild 4 oled.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
114
Integrated features
Here you can obtain information on the integrated features of the
TV set.
See the rating plate on the rear of the set for the precise product
designation.
Call Integrated features
HOME: Calling the Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Extras,
go to next column.
 Mark Integrated features,
OK call Integrated features
(1
.
 Select category (e.g. hardware, software,
etc.),
 If necessary, scroll content up/down.
Hardware Under the Hardware item, you can find the article
and serial number of your TV set, the MAC address
and the chassis type with all existing hardware
components.
Software Under the item software, the current software ver-
sion and the installed software features of your TV
set are displayed.
Upgrade Under the item Upgrade you can find the installed
software features with their respective status.
Activated: software feature is installed and can be
used.
Not active: software feature is installed, but can not
be used.
Activate
package
Under the Activate package item, you can enter
an acquired unlock code to enable new features, if
available.
Reset to factory settings
Here you can reset some of the settings to the factory default values.
Call Reset to factory settings
HOME: Calling the Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Extras,
go to next column.
 Mark Reset to factory settings,
OK call.
 Select a category you want to reset,
OK call.
 Select Start reset,
OK call.
Entire TV Set
This resets the entire TV set to factory defaults.
By resetting the entire TV set to the factory default
state, all the settings you made and all stored
stations will be deleted.
Thereafter, an initial installation of the TV set is
carried out again (see chapter Initial installation).
Picture/
sound
The current image and sound parameters of your TV
set will be deleted and reset to the factory defaults.
Network
The current network settings of your TV set will be
deleted and reset to the factory defaults.
HDMI
The HDMI setting is reset to the factory settings.
Browser
The current browser settings of your TV set will be
deleted and reset to the factory defaults.
All data stored in the course of use are deleted.
Media data
base
Your current media database is deleted because
the database is reinitialised. The information from
the removable media (USB) and possibly the DR+
archive are then re-read.
The system then automatically performs a system
reset.
......
This resets the entire TV set to its factory settings.
Entire TV Set
Network
Picture/
sound
HDMI
Browser
Media data
base
System settings
Extras
(1
The screen graphic displayed is only an example. Depending on the device type, the available hardware/software components may be different.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
115
Conditional Access module (CA module)
In order to receive coded digital stations, a Conditional Access module
(CA module) and a Smart Card must be inserted in the CI slot of your
TV set.
The CA module and the Smart Card are not part of the set of
equipment supplied with the TV set. They are usually available from
your dealer. Loewe does not provide any guarantee for the functioning
of the CA module.
The TV set must first recognise and set up the CA module during initial
operation. Therefore, it can take up to a minute until decoding starts
during initial operation.
Inserting the Smart Card into the CA module
Push the Smart Card into the CA module as far as it will go. The side
of the card with the gold chip on it should be pointing towards the
thicker side of the insertion slot (see illustration). Note the direction
of the arrow printed on the Smart Card.
Inserting the CA module into the TV set’s CI slot
Switch off TV set using the mains switch.
Remove the cover from the rear of the set.
Insert the CA module carefully into one of the two CI slots, ensuring
that the contact side goes in first. Do not use force. Make sure the
module is not twisted in the process. Push the CA module in as far as
it will go.
Finally, close the side cover.
Troubleshooting (CA module)
The following information can help, if problems should occur when
running a CA module:
Switch the TV set off to the standby mode. Remove the CA-module
from the TV set. Switch the TV set off completely. Wait a few seconds.
Reinsert the CA module. Switch the TV set on again.
Should errors continue to occur, you will get further information
resulting from the two-digit error code (only with CI Plus capable
CA modules). You will find the table with the error codes in chapter
Miscellaneous, section CA module error codes. If in doubt, contact
your dealer.
Smart Card
CA module
Contact side
Common Interface (CI/CI Plus)
Common Interface, also called CI, is a interface in the TV set, into which
a Conditional Access Module (CA module, see right column) can be
plugged. The CA module and the smartcard from a corresponding Pay
TV supplier enable reception of encrypted stations.
CI Plus is an advanced development of the DVB Common Interface
Standard. CI Plus slots are in principle downward compatible to the
previous CI standard, i.e. CA modules and Smart Cards according to
the past CI standard can continue to be used in CI Plus slots, as far as
the programme provider permits this.
Programme providers who use the CI Plus standard can assign
different rights for their broadcast programmes.
For instance, the programme provider can restrict or completely
prevent recording or later watching of an encoded programme.
If there are such regulations, these also apply to timeshift television
accordingly.
A screen message informs you of this fact, if you would like to record
such a programme. Recording is carried out in such a case (an
appropriate entry is displayed in the DR+ archive), later watching of
the programme, however, is not possible at all or only for a limited
period (e.g., 10 days).
A possible time limitation of the playback will also appear in the
corresponding entry in the DR+ archive.
All restrictions mentioned here are the responsibilities of the
broadcaster. The TV simply values the signalling set by the
broadcaster as neutral.
Furthermore, the programme provider can prevent external copying
of protected programmes.
It could be necessary to enter the youth protection PIN of the CA
module when programming the data, if you want to record a CI Plus
protected programme, which has been protected against viewing by
minors.
The Parental lock PIN can also be stored in the TV set. The access code
of the TV set is required for watching the programme later.
Software update for CI Plus capable CA modules
From time to time, there will be new system software for your CA
module software. There are two software update types.
Recommended update:
Information on an available update is displayed. You can either run this
or cancel the procedure. If you do not install the update, the information
will reappear in regular intervals until the update has been installed.
Forced update:
Information on an available update is displayed. The module does no
longer decode until the update has been successfully implemented.
System settings
Extras
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
116
Searching for scrambled stations
If no search for encrypted stations was performed during initial startup,
this can be done later using the search wizard.
HOME: Call Home view.
 Select System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Stations,
go to next column.
Automatic scan TV+Radio,
go to next column.
Select Change search settings,
OKwizard guides you through the search settings.
Under scrambled stations you have to select yes.
Next select Start search/update,
OK start updating the station list.
Calling CA module information
This menu is only available when a CA module is
plugged in.
HOME: Call Home view.
 Mark System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Mark Extras,
go to next column.
 Select desired CA module.
The indicated name depends on the inserted
CA module.
go to next column.
 Select Module menu,
OK call information.
The content of this menu depends on the provider of
the CA module.
Smartcard rights
If two CA modules are used in parallel to decode stations, you specify
here the rights of both smartcards.
 Mark Smartcard rights
go to next column.
 Select Same rights or Different rights.
If you select Same rights, the TV set assumes that
both smartcards have the same rights and can be used
for Dual Recording in parallel. In this case, the Station
mapping function is not available.
When selecting Different rights, you can assign the
stations to be decoded to the respective CA module.
Station mapping
If two CA modules are both used for the decoding of stations, you
decide here which station shall be decoded by which CA module.
The station mapping settings will only be taken into account, if two
CA modules are plugged.
This menu item is only available if under Smartcard rights the
item Different rights was selected.
This statement refers explicitly to the CI slots of the TV set and not
to the modules plugged into it! When the modules are exchanged,
the mapping must be repeated.
 Mark Station Mapping,
call station list.
 Select CA module for mapping.
 Mark station,
OK map station to the selected CA module / cancel
mapping.
Behind the assigned station is the number of the
corresponding CI slot.
Storage the PIN for recordings
Store the programme provider PIN belonging to your CA module in
order to decode CI plus programmes with parental lock for recording.
The menu option is available only if the plugged CA module supports
storing the parental lock PIN.
 Mark Storage of PIN for recordings,
call PIN entry box.
 Mark the desired CA module in the headline.
 Go to the PIN input line, use the numerical keys
to enter the programme provider PIN.
Or:
 Mark figure,
OK adopt figure to input line.
To conclude the entry:
 Mark Adopt,
OK save PIN.
Removing the CA module
Switch off TV set using the mains switch.
Remove the cover from the rear of the set.
Pull the CA module out of the CI slot.
Replace the cover.
System settings
Extras
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
117
Devices to the HDMI connections
The HDMI connections (High Definition Multimedia Interface) allow
the transmission of digital video and audio signals from a player (e.g.
DVD player, Blu-ray player, game console, camcorder, set-top box)
via a single cable.
The digital video and audio data are transmitted without data compres-
sion digitally and therefore lose none of their quality.
A maximum of five devices can be connected in cascade to every HDMI
socket. The devices are arranged in the AV list and in the station list
below the appropriate HDMI socket. If the respective device sends
its own device name, this appears in place of the connection name.
Connecting the device
Switch off all devices before connecting them.
Connect the device by an HDMI cable (Type A, 19-pole) to one of the
HDMI sockets of the TV set.
An HDMI device is connected to the side HDMI socket (e.g. camcorder)
in the same way as shown in the figure.
If you use HDMI sources providing UHD content, they should be con-
nected to the HDMI 4 UHD port.
Please note that not all signals may be represented on any HDMI
socket (see chapter Technical Data, section Signals via AV (PC
IN) / HDMI)
Connection example of an HDMI device (e.g. Blu-ray Player)
HDMI
HDMI1
Blu-ray player
TV set
Playback from the device
If the device at HDMI supports the Digital Link HD functionality, the
TV set will automatically switch to the corresponding HDMI input after
starting the replay at the HDMI device.
The HDMI input can also be called up manually:
Call Sources.
Select HDMI socket.
With Digital Link HD-capable devices the
device name may possibly appear in place
of the connection name.
OK switch over.
Start playback on the connected HDMI device. The
best possible format for the picture is detected and
set automatically.
Renaming the HDMI port designation
The port designation of the HDMI jacks can be renamed manually.
Call Sources
Select desired HDMI socket.
OK switch over.
MENU: Call function list.
 Select Rename,
OK call.
Enter new name (information on how to enter
characters, see also section General information on
operation, section Entering characters with
on-screen keyboard).
 Select adopt,
OK New name for the HDMI jack is adopted.
External devices
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
118
External devices
Digital Link HD
Operation of Digital Link HD (HDMI CEC) enabled devices
The Digital Link HD (HDMI CEC) function allows Loewe television sets
to transmit the remote control signals via the HDMI connection of the
TV set to compatible HDMI devices (such as Loewe BluTechVison 3D).
You can therefore set up and use a concealed CEC capable HDMI
device.
Thus, you can install a concealed CEC-enabled HDMI device and
operate it easily.
You can select and operate the CEC-capable HDMI device in two
different ways. On the one hand, by using a device key (STB, VIDEO
or AUDIO) to switch to the operation of the HDMI device. On the
other hand, by using the TV key to switch between HDMI device and
the TV set.
Switching between operation of TV set and HDMI device using
a device key
Assign the HDMI CEC function (code 22) to the desired device key
(STB, VIDEO or AUDIO). The assignment is described in chapter
External devices, section Setting the remote control – Setting
the remote control for other Loewe devices.
Subsequently, the assignment of the HDMI device used to the preset
device key will be done.
The CEC capable HDMI device is connected to one
of the HDMI sockets of the TV set and switched on.
Press required button for 5 seconds.
A selection menu appears on the TV set.
 Select required device from the list.
OK Accept.
The assignment of the device key and the
assignment of the HDMI device are completed.
Press the corresponding device key to switch to the
operation of the HDMI device.
The remote control commands are routed from the TV
set to the HDMI device.
Press the TV key to switch to the operation of the TV
set.
If the Auto off function (see right column) is enabled,
the HDMI device switches off.
Select HDMI device for key
No device
BluTech Vision
Select HDMI device for key Back
Cancel
Switching between operation of TV set and HDMI device
using the TV key
Switching the control via the TV key is only possible when no device
key is assigned to the HDMI device you are using.
Call Quellen.
Select a HDMI socket to which the HDMI device
is connected.
Pressing TV for a longer period: switch remote control
commands between HDMI and TV operation.
A message on the screen informs you about the
currently selected mode.
Pressing briefly TV: Switch to TV mode (back to
previous station).
Automatically switching off external devices
When returning to TV mode by briefly pressing the TV key the external
device can be switched off.
You can find the settings in the System settings ט Connections ט
Digital Link ט Shutdown of the ext. device via TV button.
Menu item only available if at Digital Link HD - Functionality ט
on has been selected.
Remote switch on of the tv set
You can select whether the TV set is to switch on automatically from
Standby mode if a disc is played or a screen menu displayed on a
Digital Link HD-enabled device.
You can find the settings in the System settings ט Connections ט
Digital Link ט Remote switch on of the tv set.
Menu item only available if at Digital Link HD - Functionality ט
on has been selected.
Switching off the TV set and connected devices (system standby)
The operation of the TV set must be enabled (see
above).
Press the key briefly: TV set and all CEC-enabled de-
vices connected to the HDMI ports will be switched
off to standby (system standby).
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
119
Connecting a DVD player to the TV set
A DVD player has been selected in the System settings ט AV
connecting settings ט Device at connection AV.
Switch off all devices before connecting them.
Connect the Scart output of the DVD player to the TV set’s AV socket
using the Scart adaptor
(1
.
Use a fully equipped Scart cable (available from your dealer) for this.
Playback from AV device
If the device at AV supports the Digital Link Plus functionality or if in
the System settings ט Connections ט AV connecting settingsט
Allow switching voltage ט yes, the TV set will automatically switch
to the corresponding AV input after starting the replay at the AV device.
The AV input can also be called manually, however.
Call Sources.
Select AV,
OK switch over.
Start playback on the connected device.
Connection example of a DVD player
AV
AV
DVD player
TV set
External devices
(1
Adaptor is available as an accessory (see chapter Accessories).
Devices on AV
The AV connection socket offers the possibility to connect e.g. a DVD
player, video/DVD recorder or PC via two different adapters.
The required adapters (Scart or VGA adapter) are available as an
accessory from your Loewe dealer (see chapter Accessories).
The AV sockets can process different signal types. Which signal type
your accessory device provides can be found in the operating manual
of the appropriate device.
Owing to the large number of AV devices available on the market, we
can only mention a few examples for the connection of accessory
equipment to the AV socket here.
Remote TV switch on via Digital Link
You can select whether the TV set is to switch on automatically from
Standby mode if a disc is played or a screen menu displayed on a
Digital Link Plus-enabled device connected to AV.
You can find the settings in the System settings ט Connections ט
Digital Link ט Remote switch on of the TV set.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
120
External devices
(1
Adaptor is available as an accessory (see chapter Accessories).
Connecting a DVD recorder to the TV set
A DVD recorder has been selected in the System settings ט
Connections ט AV connecting settings ט Device at connec-
tion AV.
Switch off all devices before connecting them.
Connect the Scart output of the DVD player to the TV set’s AV socket
using the Scart adaptor
(1
. Use a fully equipped Scart cable (available
from your dealer) for this.
If you want to receive and record analogue stations with the receiver
(tuner) built into the recorder, the recorder must be looped into the
aerial cable.
Connect the DVD recorder as shown in the connection example below.
Playback from AV device
Call Sources.
Select AV,
OK switch over.
Start playback on the connected device.
Connection example of a DVD recorder
ANT IN
ANT OUT
AV
R
TV
AVANT TV
DVD recorder
TV set
Connecting PC / Set-top box
You can connect a PC and thus use the TV screen as a monitor.
When connecting a PC or auxiliary device to the AV socket of the
TV set, adjust the output signal on your PC first so that it matches
one of the signals in the table in chapter Technical data, section
Signals via AV (PC IN) / HDMI.
Switch off all devices before connecting them.
Connect the device to the TV set’s AV socket with a VGA cable and
the VGA adaptor
(1
.
Connect the analogue audio signal of the PC to the VGA adaptor via
the jack plug socket.
Playback from the device
Call Sources.
Select PC IN,
OK switch over.
Adjusting the geometry of the PC picture
You can set the position (vertical, horizontal) and the phase position of
your PC. The settings you find under System settings ט Pictureט
more ... ט PC IN - Display.
Connecting devices with component connection (YPbPr / YUV)
External units with component connection YPbPr (often informally
referred to as YUV; see also Glossary) can be connected to the AV
socket of the TV set using two adaptors. In addition to the VGA adaptor,
a component VGA adaptor is required (available from your dealer).
The other units are connected as described in the left column.
Connection example of a PC
VGAAUDIO
AV
PC
TV set
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
121
External devices
Connecting the speaker system (DAL)
You can easily connect a Loewe speaker system using the DIGITAL
AUDIO LINK interface (DAL) of your TV set.
Switch off all devices before connecting the speaker system.
The subwoofer is connected to the TV set via the DIGITAL AUDIO
LINK interface. Plug a network cable (Category 5e or higher) to the
DIGITAL AUDIO LINK port of the TV set.
If you are using a subwoofer with DIGITAL AUDIO LINK interface
(for example klang 1 subwoofer or klang 5 subwoofer), connect the
network cable directly to the subwoofer.
For subwoofers with AUDIO LINK interface (see picture below),
connect the Ethernet cable to the RJ45 jack of the optionally available
Digital Audiolink / Audiolink converter.
Connect the converter to the AUDIO LINK socket of the Subwoofer.
Further information on the wiring of the speakers you find in the
instruction manual of the subwoofer or the speakers.
Configuration of the speaker system (DAL)
When configuring the sound system in the Sound Component Wizard,
you can eg enter the distances of each speaker corresponding to your
listening position or adjust the level of each speaker individually.
This guarantees a natural spatial image of the sound (see chapter
System settings, section Connections – Sound components).
DIGITAL AUDIO LINK
TV set
Subwoofer
Converter
Digital Audiolink / Audiolink
Ethernet cable
(Cat. 5e or higher)
Front
left
Front
right
Surround
left
Surround
right
Center
Example of connecting a speaker system
(Subwoofer with AUDIO LINK) to your TV set
Connecting the speaker system (AUDIO OUT)
You can easily connect a speaker system using the AUDIO OUT
interface of your TV set.
Switch off all devices before connecting the speaker system.
The subwoofer is connected to the TV set via the AUDIO OUT
interface.
Connect the analogue audio output AUDIO OUT of the TV set with a
stereo cinch/jack adapter cable to the Line IN audio inputs left/right
of the subwoofer.
Further information on the wiring of the speakers you find in the
instruction manual of the subwoofer or the speakers.
Only turn in the power switch of the subwoofer after having selected
the menu item Speaker system (AUDIO OUT) in the Sound
Component Wizard. Otherwise, the sound system will operate with
maximum volume.
Configuration of the speaker system (AUDIO OUT)
When configuring the sound system in the sound components wizard
enter if you want to use e.g. external front speakers or how the TV
speaker is used (see chapter System settings, section Connections
– Sound components).
Only turn in the power switch of the subwoofer after having selected
the menu item Speaker system (AUDIO OUT) in the Sound
Component Wizard. Otherwise, the sound system will operate with
maximum volume.
AUDIO OUT
TV set
Subwoofer
Line IN
left
Line IN
right
Front
left
Front
right
Example of connecting a speaker system to your TV set
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
122
Connecting active loudspeakers
If you want to use active speakers, you can connect them with an
adapter cable to the TV set.
Plug a network cable (Category 5e or higher) to the AUDIO LINK
port of the TV set. Connect the Ethernet cable to the RJ45 socket
of the Digital Audiolink / Audiolink converter available as ac-
cessory. To the other end of the convertor you connect the adaptor
cable Audiolink / 30cm / 9pin + 5.1 Out + Center In. Connect
the cinch connectors of the adaptor cable to the cinch connectors of
the speakers / subwoofer.
The cinch connections of the adaptor cable are labelled:
R for Front right SR for Surround right
L for Front left SL for Surround left
C for Centre SUB for Subwoofer
The connections for the adaptor cable are pre-amplifier
outputs. Therefore, only active loudspeakers / active
subwoofers may be connected directly to the adaptor cable.
Sound reproduction via the speaker system
The settings for sound reproduction via active speakers you find in the
sound components wizard (see chapter System settings, section
Connections – Sound components).
R
SR
SL
L
C
SUB
CENTER
IN
DIGITAL
AUDIO
LINK
R
SR
SL
C
SUB
L
Front
left Center
Front
right
Surround
left
Adapter cable
Surround
right
TV set
Subwoofer
Ethernet cable
(Cat. 5e or higher)
Converter
Digital Audiolink / Audiolink
Connection of active speakers to the TV set
External devices
Connecting the HiFi/AV amplifier
Connecting digital HiFi/AV amplifiers
Connect the digital audio output of the TV set SPDIF OUT to the digital
audio input of the amplifier via a cinch cable:
Connect digital audio (pre) amplifier via audio return channel
(HDMI ARC)
Connect the HDMI1 socket of the TV using an HDMI cable with the
HDMI socket of the ARC-compatible audio (pre) amplifier (e.g.Loewe
MediaVision 3D). It is not necessary to log-in the amplifier separately
with the TV set.
Connecting analogue HiFi/AV amplifiers
Use a stereo cinch/jack adaptor cable to connect the analogue audio
output AUDIO OUT to the analogue audio input of the amplifier:
Reproducing sound via an HiFi/AV amplifier
The sound reproduction via connected HiFi/AV amplifiers can be
adjusted in the sound components wizard (see chapter System set-
tings, section Connections – Sound components).
DIGITAL IN
SPDIF
OUT
Digital amplifier
TV set
AUDIO
OUT
AUDIO IN
R
L
Analogue amplifier
TV set
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
123
External devices
(1
Adaptor available as an accessory (see chapter Accessories).
IR-Link
The IR Link function allows the operation of concealed additional
devices made by other manufacturers via the Loewe TV set.
The remote control commands are passed from the IR receiver of
the TV set via an externally connected infrared transmitter to the
additional device.
The code system for remote control commands that control the
additional device is RC5.
The control of the additional device is only possible when the TV set
is switched on.
The infrared transmitter required is available as an accessory from
your dealer (see chapter Accessories).
Connecting the infrared transmitter to the TV set
Insert the connector plug of the infrared transmitter into the RS-232C
socket of the TV set.
Lay the cable of the infrared transmitter to the front area of the ad-
ditional device used.
Installing the infrared transmitter on the additional device
Find the right position on the desired device (optical connection
between transmitter diode and IR receiver of the concealed device).
Remove the protective film from the adhesive surface of the infrared
transmitter.
Attach the infrared transmitter at this position.
RS-232C
IR
TV set
Serial interface RS-232C (RJ12)
You can connect a home network system of different manufacturers
(e.g. AMX, Crestron) to your TV set via the RS-232C (RJ12) interface.
As to the configuration of the RS-232C (RJ12) interface and for further
information on the various home networking systems contact your
dealer please.
Audio playback from external devices
Connect external AV devices (e.g., MP3 player) for sound reproduction
to the AV inputs of the TV set.
Connecting an external appliance (e.g. MP3 player)
Connect the output (jack socket) of the MP3 player via the VGA
adaptor
(1
to the AV socket of the TV set.
Select AV input
The selection of the AV input for a device at the AV socket
(connection as described above) is describe here as an example.
The procedure is similar to the selection of the other AV inputs.
Call Sources.
Mark desired AV source,
OK switch to AV source.
Start playback on the external device after selecting
the AV input.
Only playback of the audio signal from the AV source (screen
is off)
To play only the sound of a connected media player (e.g. MP3 player),
the AV sources can be selected so that the screen goes blank.
Switching off the screen reduces the power consumption of the
TV set.
Switching off the screen is possible for the AV sources HDMI1, HDM2,
HDM3 and HDMI 4 UHD via the function list.
Call up the AV list.
Select desired connection,
OK press at least for two seconds.
Green key: Press the green key to switch the the
screen on and off again.
AV
MP3 player TV set
Connection example of an MP3 player
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
124
External devices
Setting the remote control
Using the remote control for the TV mode of the TV set
Press the TV key, the LED above it will light for approx.
5 seconds.
Using the remote control for a Loewe recorder
Press the STB key, the LED above it will light for approx.
5 seconds.
Using the remote control for a Loewe player
Press the VIDEO key, the LED above it will light for
approx. 5 seconds.
Using the remote control for the radio mode of the TV set
Press the AUDIO key, the display above it will light for
approx. 5 seconds.
As long as a key is pressed, the LED for the selected operating mode
lights up (TVSTBVIDEOAUDIO). This allows you to check
which operating mode the remote control is set to every time you
press a button.
The factory setting of the keys is described above (see also table in
right hand column). The assignment of the buttons can be changed
to suit the existing accessory devices (see right hand column).
Set unit for sound control function on the remote control
The keys for the sound control functions Volume (
10
)
and Sound on/off
(
1
)
are programmed ex-factory to interact with the TV set. The unit to
be operated can be modified.
The device must first be placed on one of the device key of the
remote control (see right column) before the tone-control functions
can be changed to the appropriate device.
Press the TV key and the numerical key simultane-
ously for minimum 5 seconds. The LED above the
selected TV key flashes twice.
Function Buttons Unit
Audio
Functions
TV + 3 Auro/AudioVision/MediaVision 3D
TV + 4 Mediacenter
TV + 5 Loewe TV
TV + 6 Loewe TV with sound projector with-
out system connection
Setting the remote control for other Loewe devices
You can operate various Loewe devices with the remote control. The
device keys STBVIDEOAUDIO can be reassigned to operate
different Loewe devices.
Press the required device key and the STOP key
simultaneously for 5 sec. until the corresponding LED
display flashes twice.
Then enter the two-digit device code from the list below.
The corresponding LED indicator light flashes twice.
Unit Code Factory setting
Loewe ViewVision 8106 H 10
Loewe Viewvision, Centros 21x2 12
Loewe ViewVision DR
+
DVB-T 13
Loewe Auro 2216 PS/8116 DT 14
Loewe BluTech Vision Interactive 15
Loewe Sound Projector 17
SetTopBox (STB) data base 18
Loewe TV - Digital radio 19 Audio
Loewe Mediacenter 20
Loewe BluTech Vision 3D 21 VIDEO
HDMI CEC mode 22
Loewe AudioVision 24
Loewe Individual Sound Projector ID 25
Apple IR codes 26
Apple IR codes (Apple TV-2G) 27 STB
Loewe Soundbox 28
Loewe SoundVision 29
Loewe AirSpeaker 30
Loewe Soundport 31
Loewe MediaVision 3D 35
Restore defaults 99
The codes shown here only apply to direct operation of the auxiliary
device device.
The available codes may vary depending on the status of the firm-
ware in the remote control.
The factory setting of the device keys can vary depending on the
firmware version of the remote control
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
125
Teaching the remote control
Teaching the remote control
By means of key code 18 (Set-Top Box data base) your remote control
Assist may be taught for your Set-Top Box (e.g., decoder, external cable
tuner). Thus, you spare yourself the use of several remote controls.
For the use of 2-digit key codes see chapter External devices,
section Setting the remote control.
The following options are available for teach-in:
- Entering a 3-digit code number
- Read-out of the programmed Set-Top Box code
- Teaching individual keys
- Delete learned codes
In the following, the STB key is dealt with as an example since
device code 18 is preset for this key ex-works. Code 18 may also be
assigned to the VIDEO and AUDIO keys; the following description
applies accordingly.
Entering a 3-digit code number
The STB key can be programmed directly by means of a device-
dependent 3-digit code. You find a list of these codes in chapter Code
page at the end of this user handbook.
Keep the STB and OK keys depressed for five seconds.
The LED above the STB key flashes twice.
Enter the 3-digit code from the list. The LED above the
STB key lights up for 1 second.
OK end the programming mode. After a successful
programming the LED flashes twice.
When entering a wrong code number, the LED lights
up for 2 seconds. Do this programming once again.
Read-out of the programmed Set-Top Box code
The code of the currently programmed device on the STB key can be
indicated by the remote control.
Keep the STB and OK keys depressed for five seconds.
The LED above the STB key flashes twice.
Press INFO key.
The LED above the STB key shows the programmed
code by flashing. The figure "0" will be indicated by
flashing 5 times.
Teaching individual keys
All keys (except the TV, STB, VIDEO and AUDIO device keys as well
as the V+/- keys
and ) can be taught for the operation of units
which are not contained in the integrated data base. The functions of
the selected button are then completely or partially overwritten with
the new codes.
Place the TV remote control and the remote control to be replaced
in such a way that the infrared windows face each other at a distance
of 1-5 cm (see sketch).
Keep the STB and the red key simultaneously
depressed for five seconds. The LED above the STB
key lights up permanently.
Press key to be taught on the TV remote control.
The LED above the STB key flashes.
On the original remote control press the button
which is to be taught.
The LED above the selected STB key flashes twice.
If the code is not correctly recognised, the LED above
the STB key flashes ten times. Then repeat your entry
on the original remote control. If necessary correct the
allocation of the two remote controls. Continue with
the other buttons as described above.
To end the teaching mode, press the STB key again.
After 10 seconds without an entry the teaching mode
is automatically terminated.
It is possible that not all remote control codes can
be taught.
You can make a note of the functions, which you
have allocated to the keys, on the notes pages at the
end of this user handbook.
1-5 cm
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
126
Teaching the remote control
Deleting individual key functions
You can delete the taught function of an individual button.
Press STB and green key simultaneously for five
seconds. The LED above the STB key lights up perma-
nently.
Press key to be deleted on the TV remote control.
The LED above the STB key flashes twice.
Continue with the deletion of other buttons as
described above.
To end the deletion mode, press the STB key again.
The LED above the STB key flashes once.
Deleting all functions of the key for a device
You can delete all taught functions which you have set on the STB key.
Press STB and yellow key simultaneously for five
seconds. The LED above the STB key flashes twice.
Deleting all functions of the keys for all devices
You can delete all taught functions which you have set on the TV, STB,
VIDEO or AUDIO buttons.
Press STB and blue key simultaneously for five
seconds. The LEDs above the keys for the devices flash
twice.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
127
Problem Possible cause Remedy / Instructions
The TV set switches off automatically. The automatic shutdown switches off the
TV set to save energy after 4 hours of
inactivity as soon as at least one signal input
group is set up in the energy efficient mode
Home Mode.
Using automatic shutdown is recommended
for the purposes of energy saving and safety.
All menus are displayed in the wrong lan-
guage.
The menu language was set incorrectly. Set the menu language:
Press HOME key. Call last menu item
(bottom left). Mark the fourth item from above
in the following list and move to next column to
the right. Call first list item with OK. Select the
language and confirm it with OK.
General problems when connecting external
devices via an AV input.
The Signal type is set incorrectly. Set the correct signal type (System settings
ט Connections ט AV connection settings
טSignal type).
If AV standard or Signal type is set to
Automatic then this can lead to false
detections with non-standard signals. In this
case standard and signal must be set according
to the information in the operating manual of
the external device.
With Teletext various characters are
displayed incorrectly.
The wrong character set has been set in the
System settings.
Set the correct character set: System
settings ט Control ט more ... ט Standard
Teletext ט Character set ט Standard or
select the appropriate character set.
Errors occurred when running a CA module. Switch the TV set off. Remove the CA-module
from the TV set. Wait a few seconds. Reinsert
the CA module. Switch the TV set on again.
No sound via the external digital audio am-
plifier.
a) The external digital audio amplifier does
not support the selected sound format
(Dolby Digital, dts, MPEG).
b) TV set and external digital audio amplifier
are not connected with each other.
a) Set PCM stereo on the DVD player in the
sound selection. For DVB stations switch
Language/Sound
b) Connect SPDIF OUT from the TV set to a
digital input of the external digital audio
amplifier and select the appropriate input
to this.
A programmed recording was not made. The provider deleted the programme from
the EPG data, for example due to a programme
change.
The station from which the recording was
made does not support automatic time
control (Accurate Recording).
Only the broadcasting organisations are
responsible for transmitting data for the
automatic time control. The availability of
the appropriate data cannot be guaranteed.
There is no start or end of a programmed
recording although the automatic time
control (Accurate Recording) was used.
The transmission time of the program was
delayed and the channel from which the
recording was made has not updated the data.
Only the broadcasting organisations are
responsible for transmitting data for the
automatic time control. The availability of
the appropriate data cannot be guaranteed.
No IP address will be issued to your TV set in
spite of automatic IP configuration.
No DHCP server is working on your network. Set up a DHCP server.
Assign the IP addresses for the TV set
manually.
Troubleshooting
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
128
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible cause Remedy / Instructions
Despite video or music file being played back,
no sound can be heard.
a) The TV set is set to mute or the volume has
been turned down too much.
b) An audio device that does not exist or that
is not connected, is registered under
System settings ט Connections ט
Sound components (e.g., HiFi/AV am-
plifier).
a) Increase the volume by pressing the V+ key
on the remote control for a longer time. This
will also cancel any mute setting.
b) Connect the audio device and switch it on.
In the Sound components wizard change
back to TV speakers.
A media file that is displayed can not be played
back.
The format of the file is not supported (see also
limitations in chapter Technical data, section
Media – File formats supported.
No remedy.
Characters received in the WLAN code of the
wireless router cannot be entered for the
network configuration at the TV set.
The device does not support all special
characters.
Change the WLAN key of the router.
When searching for wireless routers, no
device is found.
The router is not ready for wireless
communication.
Check your wireless router.
Try to make the connection again a few
minutes later.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
129
Technical data
Changes of technical data and design of the equipment reserved.
Loewe device type:
bild 5.65 set bild 5.55 set bild 5.65 oled bild 5.55 oled
Part number: 57440x00 57441x00 57440x50 57441x50
EU energy efficiency class:
see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/my-loewe
Screen diagonal: 164 cm / 65 inch 139 cm / 55 inch 164 cm / 65 inch 139 cm / 55 inch
Power consumption On-Mode (max.)
(Audio output 1/8 of the maximum value):
450 W 350 W 450 W 350 W
Power consumption On-Mode (home)
(1
:
Annual energy consumption
(1
:
see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/my-loewe
Power consumption Standby Mode:
Power consumption when set is switched off:
0,49 W
0 W
0,49 W
0 W
0,49 W
0 W
0,49 W
0 W
Resolution / Picture format: Ultra HD 3840 x 2160 px / 16:9
Display technology: OLED (WRGB Pixel)
Viewing angle (horizontal / vertical): 120° / 120°
Device dimensions without stand (W x H x D):
145,3 x 88,5 x 6,4 cm 123,0 x 76,2 x 6,4 cm 145,3 x 86,5 x 5,6 cm 123,0 x 74,2 x 5,6 cm
Weight without stand (approximate):
26,7 kg 21,4 kg 25,7 kg 20,4 kg
Ambient temperature: 5° C – 35° C
Relative humidity (non-condensing): 20 – 80%
Air pressure: 800 – 1114 hPa (0 – 2000 m above sea level)
Chassis designation: SL4xx
Power supply: 220 V – 240 V/50–60 Hz
Tuner: terr./cable:
Satellite:
VHF/Hyperband/UHF
4 levels: 13/18V/22kHz / 16 levels: DiSEqC 1.0 / single-cable system: EN 50494
Range: terr./cable:
Satellite:
Terr./cable: 45 MHz up to 860 MHz
Satellite: 950 MHz up to 2150 MHz
Station storage locations incl. AV and radio: 6000
TV standards: analogue:
digital:
B/G, I, L, D/K, M, N
DVB-T/T2, DVB-C, DVB-S/S2 (UHD via DVB to max. 60 Hz)
Colour standards: SECAM, PAL, NTSC, NTSC-V, PAL-V (60 Hz)
Sound standards: analogue (FM):
analogue (NICAM):
digital (MPEG):
Mono, Stereo, Dual channel
Mono, Stereo, Dual channel
Mono, Stereo, Dual channel, PCM, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital Pulse, Dolby
Virtual Speaker, Dolby Pro Logic II, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby MS11, DTS, DTS HD
Audio output power (sine / music): 2 x 20W / 2 x40W
Acoustic speaker concept: Soundbar --- ---
Teletext: TOP / FLOF / HiText (Level 2.5)
Page memory: 2000
LAN: Standards supported: 10 Mbit/sec Ethernet (10Base-T) / 100 Mbit/sec Fast Ethernet (100Base-T)
WLAN: Standards supported:
Frequency range used:
Types of encoding that are supported:
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n, 802.11ac
Power <100 mW at 2400-2483,5 MHz and 5150-5725 MHz
WEP 64 and 128 Bit (ASCII and HEX), WPA PSK, WPA2 AES
Bluetooth: Power / Frequency range:
Bluetooth protocols:
Power <10 mW at 2.4 GHz
A2DP SRC, A2DP SNK, HID
Home networking standard: Universal Plug and Play Audio / Video (UPnP AV)
File formats supported
(2
: Pictures:
Audio:
Video:
JPEG, PNG
MP3, M4A (AAC LC), WMA (without lossless), FLAC, WAV (PCM), Ogg Vorbis
AVI (MPEG-1/2, XviD, Dolby Digital, MP3), WMV (WMV9, VC-1, WMA9, WMA Pro),
MP4 (XviD, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC), MOV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC),
MKV (H.265/HEVC, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, Dolby Digital), FLV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.263,
MP3, AAC LC),
MPG (MPEG-1, MPEG Audio), TS/PS (MPEG-2, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, MPEG2
Audio, Dolby Digital)
, VOB (MPEG-2, MPEG2 Audio, Dolby Digital)
H.264/MPEG-4 AVC upto Profil High (Level 4.2)
H.264/H.265 support Dolby Vision/HDR 10/HLG
(1
The energy consumption per year is calculated on the basis of a daily four-hour operation of the TV set on 365 days. The actual energy consumption will depend on the
way the TV set is used. On-Mode (home) values less than 100 W must have decimal places (,0).
(2
For the playability of the individual formats no guarantee can be given.
Technical Data
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
130
Technical Data
Technical data
Changes of technical data and design of the equipment reserved.
Loewe device type:
bild 4.55 oled
Part number: 57441W90
EU energy efficiency class:
see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/my-loewe
Screen diagonal: 139 cm / 55 inch
Power consumption On-Mode (max.)
(Audio output 1/8 of the maximum value):
348 W
Power consumption On-Mode (home)
(1
:
Annual energy consumption
(1
:
see enclosed energy label or under www.loewe.tv/int/my-loewe
Power consumption Standby Mode:
Power consumption when set is switched off:
0,49 W
0 W
Resolution / Picture format: Ultra HD 3840 x 2160 px / 16:9
Display technology: OLED (WRGB Pixel)
Viewing angle (horizontal / vertical): 120° / 120°
Device dimensions without stand (W x H x D):
123,0 x 76,2 x 6,4 cm
Weight without stand (approximate):
21,3 kg
Ambient temperature: 5° C – 35° C
Relative humidity (non-condensing): 20 – 80%
Air pressure: 800 – 1114 hPa (0 – 2000 m above sea level)
Chassis designation: SL415
Power supply: 220 V – 240 V/50–60 Hz
Tuner: terr./cable:
Satellite:
VHF/Hyperband/UHF
4 levels: 13/18V/22kHz / 16 levels: DiSEqC 1.0 / single-cable system: EN 50494
Range: terr./cable:
Satellite:
Terr./cable: 45 MHz up to 860 MHz
Satellite: 950 MHz up to 2150 MHz
Station storage locations incl. AV and radio: 6000
TV standards: analogue:
digital:
B/G, I, L, D/K, M, N
DVB-T/T2, DVB-C, DVB-S/S2 (UHD via DVB to max. 60 Hz)
Colour standards: SECAM, PAL, NTSC, NTSC-V, PAL-V (60 Hz)
Sound standards: analogue (FM):
analogue (NICAM):
digital (MPEG):
Mono, Stereo, Dual channel
Mono, Stereo, Dual channel
Mono, Stereo, Dual channel, PCM, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital Pulse, Dolby
Virtual Speaker, Dolby Pro Logic II, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby MS11, DTS, DTS HD
Audio output power (sine / music): 2 x 20W / 2 x40W
Acoustic speaker concept: Soundbar
Teletext: TOP / FLOF / HiText (Level 2.5)
Page memory: 2000
LAN: Standards supported: 10 Mbit/sec Ethernet (10Base-T) / 100 Mbit/sec Fast Ethernet (100Base-T)
WLAN: Standards supported:
Frequency range used:
Types of encoding that are supported:
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n, 802.11ac
Power <100 mW at 2400-2483,5 MHz and 5150-5725 MHz
WEP 64 and 128 Bit (ASCII and HEX), WPA PSK, WPA2 AES
Bluetooth: Power / Frequency range:
Bluetooth protocols:
Power <10 mW at 2.4 GHz
A2DP SRC, A2DP SNK, HID
Home networking standard: Universal Plug and Play Audio / Video (UPnP AV)
File formats supported
(2
: Pictures:
Audio:
Video:
JPEG, PNG
MP3, M4A (AAC LC), WMA (without lossless), FLAC, WAV (PCM), Ogg Vorbis
AVI (MPEG-1/2, XviD, Dolby Digital, MP3), WMV (WMV9, VC-1, WMA9, WMA Pro),
MP4 (XviD, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC), MOV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC),
MKV (H.265/HEVC, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, Dolby Digital), FLV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.263,
MP3, AAC LC),
MPG (MPEG-1, MPEG Audio), TS/PS (MPEG-2, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, MPEG2
Audio, Dolby Digital)
, VOB (MPEG-2, MPEG2 Audio, Dolby Digital)
H.264/MPEG-4 AVC upto Profil High (Level 4.2)
H.264/H.265 support Dolby Vision/HDR 10/HLG
(1
The energy consumption per year is calculated on the basis of a daily four-hour operation of the TV set on 365 days. The actual energy consumption will depend on
the way the TV set is used. On-Mode (home) values less than 100 W must have decimal places (,0).
(2
For the playability of the individual formats no guarantee can be given.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
131
Technical Data
(1
With VGA-Adapter to AV connection.
Signals via AV (PC IN) / HDMI
The following table shows the compatible signals which may be
represented by your TV set using the appropriate adapter at the AV
connection (PC IN) or at the HDMI connections (HDMI1, HDMI2,
HDMI3, HDMI 4 UHD).
Set the output signal on your device so that it matches one of the
signals in the table.
Please note that not all signals may be represented at every HDMI
socket or at AV (PC IN).
Format Horizontal
x Vertical
Frame
frequency
Connection
480i60 720 x 480i 60Hz PC IN
576i50 720 x 576i 50Hz PC IN
480p60 720 x 480p 60Hz PC IN, HDMI 1-4
576p50 720 x 576p 50Hz PC IN, HDMI 1-4
720p50 1280 x 720p 50Hz PC IN, HDMI 1-4
720p60 1280 x 720p 60Hz PC IN, HDMI 1-4
1080i50 1920 x 1080i 50Hz PC IN, HDMI 1-4
1080i60 1920 x 1080i 60Hz PC IN, HDMI 1-4
1080p24 1920 x 1080p 24Hz PC IN, HDMI 1-4
1080p25 1920 x 1080p 25Hz PC IN, HDMI 1-4
1080p30 1920 x 1080p 30Hz PC IN, HDMI 1-4
1080p50 1920 x 1080p 50Hz PC IN, HDMI 1-4
1080p60 1920 x 1080p 60Hz PC IN, HDMI 1-4
VGA 640 x 480 60Hz PC IN, HDMI 1-4
SVGA 800 x 600 60Hz PC IN, HDMI 1-3
XGA 1024 x 768 60Hz PC IN, HDMI 1-3
WXGA 1360 x 768 60Hz HDMI 1-3
SXGA 1280 x 1024 60Hz PC IN, HDMI 1-3
UHD 3840 x 2160p 24Hz HDMI 1-4
UHD 3840 x 2160p 25Hz HDMI 1-4
UHD 3840 x 2160p 30Hz HDMI 1-4
UHD 3840 x 2160p 50Hz ( 4: 2: 0) HDMI 1-4
UHD 3840 x 2160p 60Hz ( 4: 2: 0) HDMI 1-4
UHD 3840 x 2160p 50Hz HDMI 4
UHD 3840 x 2160p 60Hz HDMI 4
Signal input groups
In your TV set the signals are sorted in various signal input groups
according to their source. In addition to the source, the type of signal
is also distinguished.
For each signal input group, there are individual values for the picture
settings.
Signal
group name
Signal source/Signal type
SD Analog
cable analogue, interfaces AV, AVS, PC IN
(1
(SD)
SD Digital
DVB (SD), DR+ (SD), MPEG-Encoder
SD Media
Player
full screen display of SD videos via USB, Network,
VOD and media centre (incl. HbbTV media centre)
SD HDMI
Playback of SD video via HDMI, e.g., DVD player
HD Analog
PC IN
(1
(HD)
HD Digital
DVB (HD), DR+ (HD)
HD Media
Player
full screen display of HD videos via USB, Network,
VOD and media centre (incl. HbbTV media centre)
HD HDMI
Playback of HD videos via HDMI, e.g., Blu-Ray player
Photo Player
Playback of Photos via USB and network
Browser
Display of Web sites in the Browser (incl. Media apps)
VGA
PC IN
(1
(PC) or HDMI (PC)
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
132
Accessories
App
Loewe App
The Loewe app replaces the two existing Smart Assist and Smart
tv2move applications and combines the functionality of both apps.
The Loewe app turns your tablet into a second TV. Completely in-
dependent of your TV set, you can use the app on your tablet to zap
through the TV channels, to program recordings or to watch archive
recordings from the DR + hard disk recorder. Or browse the electronic
program guide (EPG) on your smartphone and find out about the du-
ration and content of the current program. By clicking on the desired
content, it will be displayed on your Loewe TV.
You are completely flexible in terms of space. Whether you are in the
bedroom, in the kitchen or on the terrace - as long as you are con-
nected to your home network via WLAN.
You can download the Loewe app for free in the Playstore or App Store
and install it on your tablet and / or smartphone.
With Loewe Mobile Recording, you can now easily and comfortably
program your desired broadcasts from the road in conjunction with
the Loewe App. All you need is an Internet-enabled smartphone with
the Loewe app.
The Smartphone can be used with the Loewe App as a remote control
for the TV set.
You can download the Loewe app from the Playstore or App Store and
install it on your tablet and / or smartphone.
Requirements:
Suitable for tablets and smartphones from Android 4.1.1 and Apple
iOS 8.
On the TV side, a chassis from SL2xx with the latest software version
is required.
A personal channel list must be available. If not, create personal
channel list under:
System settingsט Stations ט Station lists TV ט New personal
list.
Open DR+ archive for other devices:
System settings ט Control ט more ... ט DR+ ט DR+ Streaming
ט Share DR+ archive with other devices ט yes.
Ensure that your tablet and the Loewe TV are registered in the same
logical network.
System settings ט Multimedia / Network ט Network settings.
Select whether the TV is to be connected to the Internet via LAN
(wired) or wireless.
We recommend to connect the TV via LAN to the router / switch.
When connected via WLAN or Powerline, it can not always
be ensured that a sufficiently large data rate is available for
transmission.
Connect TV to app
Start the Loewe app and agree to the data privacy protection.
After you select your country, the language settings will be auto-
matically transferred to your smartphone/tablet.
The application automatically searches for compatible TV sets
in the home network. A list of the Loewe TV devices found in the
home network appears
The name of the TV set can be set under
System settingsט
Multimedia / Network ט Network settings ט Host name.
Tap the desired list item to select the TV. Then you can select a
personal channel list.
After selecting the station list, the charging process begins for all
data (station list, station info and program data). This can take a
few minutes. After the end of the charging process of all data, the
app is fully operational.
Overview of the areas: Station area
In the first section you will find an overview of your stations from the
respective selected channel list. With a tip on the desired program tile,
your connected TV set switches to the respective channel.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
133
Accessories
App
Switch station and stream content
As soon as you tap on a tile and a TV set is selected, this switches to
the respective program. Further information is available at the bottom
of the screen.
You will receive details on the name and progress of the current
program.
Overview of the areas: Live area
In the middle section, the transmission information such as title and
progress are available at a glance. It is also possible to switch to the
respective program with a fingertip.
Overview of the areas: TV Guide area
In the third part you will find the TV Guide. As integrated in the TV, it
replaces your program magazine. In addition, the tiles can be opened
in order to start the recording (local and on the way) as well as detailed
information.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
134
Accessories
App
In addition to the detailed information, a recording button is available.
To use the mobile recording function, it must be activated on the TV
set and the corresponding device with an Internet connection is in
standby mode.
In the last step, you will be asked which TV set to use to start the
recording. To close the timer information, tap OK.
With a further touching of the displayed information, this increases
and displays additional time information. Use the icon at the bottom
right to start streaming this program onto your tablet or smartphone.
Recording via TV Guide
To record a program or program a recording, select the respective tile
of your desired program with a finger tip.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
135
Accessories
App
DR + archive and source selection
Here you can find stored recordings from your integrated DR + archive.
If you have several TV sets with DR + functionality, you can select the
desired archive from the drop-down box. You can also find your folder
structure in the app..
Under Sources are your available network drives. Here you have direct
access to video files, which are stored on your server or NAS. You can
watch them on the TV or your tablet / smartphone.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
136
Accessories
Accessories
The following accessories are obtainable from your Loewe dealer.
Mounting options:
A variety of options for mounting your TV set on the floor, table, and
wall are available.
An overview of the available placement options can be found in the
chapter accessories, section placement options.
Loewe Sound systems:
You can perfectly combine your TV set with the Loewe sound com-
ponents. Numerous options for loudspeaker combinations can be
realised with floor-standing loudspeakers, satellite loudspeakers and
a subwoofer.
Loewe Assist Easy:
The reduced focused design of Loewe Assist Easy remote control
guarantees survey at first sight, nevertheless all important functions
are controllable with one hand. Therefore it is the optimal control centre
of the new user interface Loewe Assist Media. As a multifunctional
remote control it is able to control further Loewe products in addition.
Upgrade kits / conversion kits / cables
USB extension (part no. 70167080):
To ensure the accessibility of the USB connections or to be able to
insert USB sticks with a large housing, a USB extension can be con-
nected to the TV set. You can purchase the USB extension via your
Loewe dealer.
Converter Digital Audiolink/Audiolink (part no. 71600080):
The digital Audiolink/Audiolink convertor allows you to connect your
TV set to audio devices with a 25-pole AUDIO LINK socket.
To connect the convertor you require additionally an Ethernet cable
with RJ45 plugs, category 5e or higher with a length of at least 1m
and maximum 15m.
Adapter Micro-AV / 25cm / Scart (part no. 72150080) set of 3:
The Loewe scart adaptor allows you to extend your TV set by adding
an AV socket to connect, e.g., DVD players or DVD recorders.
Adapter Micro-AV / 25cm / VGA (part no. 72155080) set of 3:
The VGA adaptor enables the connection of a PC monitor or a Set-
top box.
Additionally to the video inputs, the adaptor for VGA is equipped with
a 3.5 mm stereo jack socket for analogue sound.
Converter RJ12 / 5m / IR (part no. 70533082) set of 3:
Converter of RJ12 to an IR transmitter to operate concealed additional
devices of other manufacturers via the Loewe TV set.
Adapter RJ12 / 2,5m / RS232 (part no. 70499082) set of 3:
RJ12 to 9-pin Sub-D connector adaptor cable for the integration of
the TV set in professional home automation systems, such as GIRA,
CRESTRON, AMX.
All accessories are subject to availability.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
137
Mounting options
Accessories
WM Slim / VESA Size 300
bild 5.65: 72115W80
bild 5.55: 72115W80
Wall Mount: WM 67
bild 5,55: 71363B00
Wall Mount: WM Isoflex 32-55
1
bild 5.65: 72815D00
bild 5.55: 72815D00
bild 5.65: 72835W00
bild 5.65: 72835H00
bild 5.55: 72855W00
bild 5.55: 72855H00
Loewe Spectral Rack
bild 5.65: 71391T20
bild 5.55: 71391T20
Table Stand: TS Plate
Floor Stand: FS 5.65 / FS 5.55
bild 5.65: 72660S00
bild 5.55: 72660S00
Table Stand: FS Plate 55_65
Various designs, sizes and colours suitable for
Loewe TV sets, sound and equipment.
(1
With separate adapter WM Slim / VESA Size 300.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
138
Environment
Power consumption
Your TV set is equipped with an eco-standby power supply. In the
standby mode, the power consumption drops to low power (see
chapter Technical data). If you want to save even more energy then
switch the device off with the mains switch. Please also note that
the EPG data (Electronic Programme Guide) is lost under certain
circumstances and possibly programmed timer recordings cannot
be carried out by the TV set.
The TV set will be completely separated from mains only when you
unplug the mains cable.
The power consumed by the TV set during operation depends on the
energy efficiency preset in the initial installation or on the setting in
the system settings.
If you activate the automatic dimming, your TV picture will adapt to
the ambient brightness. This reduces the power consumption of the
TV set.
Automatic shutdown
If the TV is not operated for 4 hours (adjustment of volume,
programme change, etc.) the TV will automatically switch to stand-by
mode to save energy. A prompt to terminate this shutdown process
appears one minute before expiry of the 4 hours.
By default, the automatic shut-off is active in the energy efficiency
mode home Mode/personal mode, premium mode.
Automatic shutdown does not occur when using the radio without
screen display (screen off).
Disposal
Cardboard box and packaging
You have made a decision to purchase a high-quality technical product
with a long service life. For disposal of the packaging, we have paid a
fee to a commissioned recycler to pick up the packaging from the
dealer in accordance with national legislation.
The device
The EU directive 2012/19/EU regulates the proper
way to recycle, handle and utilise used electronic
devices. Old electronic appliances must therefore
be disposed of separately. Never dispose of this device
in normal domestic waste!
You can hand in your old unit free of charge at identified
collection points or to your dealer if you buy a similar new unit. Other
details about re-acceptance (also for non-EU countries) are available
from your local municipal administration.
Batteries
The batteries supplied as initial equipment do not
contain any pollutants such as cadmium, lead, or
mercury.
In accordance with the Battery Directive, used batter-
ies should no longer be disposed of in the domestic
waste. Dispose of your batteries at no charge in the
collection containers which are set up for this pur-
pose in retail stores.
Licences
Dolby Audio, Dolby Vision, and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
Copyright © 2003-2015 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under
license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, DTS in
combination with the Symbol, DTS-HD, and the DTS-HD logo are
registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States
and/or other countries. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
This set contains a software which is partly based on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/).
This software is provided by the OpenSSL project as is“ and any
expressed or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the OpenSSL project
or its contributors be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental,
special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including,
but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss
of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused
and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or
tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the
use of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com).
This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.
com).
This product contains software which was developed by third parties
and / or software which is subject to GNU General Public License (GPL)
and/or GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL). You can pass on
and modify them in accordance with Version 2 of the GNU General
Public License or optionally every later version which is published by
the Free Software Foundation.
The publication of this programme by Loewe is carried out WITHOUT
ANY GUARANTEE OR SUPPORT, particularly without an implicit
guarantee concerning MARKET MATURITY or the USABILITY FOR A
SPECIFIC PURPOSE. Details can be found in the GNU General Public
License. You can obtain the software via the Loewe customer service
department.
The GNU General Public License can be downloaded from:
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/.
Environment
Legal information
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
139
Miscellaneous
Important hints on the special features of
OLED technology
To maintain the high quality of picture display permanently, your Loewe
TV set calibrates itself automatically at regular intervals. In this way,
excess TFT capacitors are discharged and so-called image sticking
effects / „ghost images“ are eliminated.
This calibration cycle will take a maximum of thirty minutes and starts
when your TV set is in standby mode. When switching the TV set off,
a screen text indicates that a pending refresh is due. In this case, do
not switch off the TV with its power switch and do not interrupt the
power supply.
Should such a calibration process be interrupted, it will be continued
when switching off the TV set next time. You still have the possibility
to start a refresh procedure manually by means of the user menu of
your Loewe TV set.
Call OLED calibration
HOME: Call Home view.
 Select System settings,
OK call System settings.
 Select Picture,
go to next column.
 Select more ...,
call other settings.
Select OLED calibration,
OKCall.
Every 1500 hours, a calibration of OLEDs is necessary. This is done
automatically as soon as the switched off TV set is cooled down. The
procedure takes about two hours. Again, you will be previously infor-
med by an on-screen display.
To avoid temporary impairments of the picture display by long-lasting
still pictures, your Loewe TV set protects itself automatically. When still
images are displayed too long (for example, forgotten videotext pages),
the TV set automatically switches to a screen-friendly contrast mode.
After a new user operation, the device immediately returns to its nor-
mal state. In addition, each menu display is terminated automatically
when the TV set detects no operation for more than three minutes.
OLED technology allows for a design with an extremely thin display.
When you have mounted your Loewe TV set on a non-motorized in-
stallation option, avoid a too excessive force when rotating the TV set.
VESA standard
Instructions on using third-party mounting options according
to the VESA standard
Loewe flat screen TV sets are specified for Loewe accessories. When
using third-party mounting options according to the VESA standard,
the manufacturer‘s instructions on the mounting options must be
observed.
Loewe accepts no liability for the use of mounting options from other
manufacturers.
On the rear wall of the TV set, there are four points of screw connections
to receive the VESA adapter bolts.
Mounting a Loewe flat screen TV set to a holder according to the VESA
standard necessarily requires the use of Loewe VESA adaptor bolts.
Otherwise, the TV set may be damaged.
Screw the Loewe VESA adapter bolts with a torque of approx. 4 Nm
into the screwing points of the TV rear panel (see Fig. 1).
First, possibly existing screws in the four screwing points must be
removed.
The Loewe VESA adaptor bolts are used to ensure stability and the
necessary minimum distance of 5 mm between rear wall of the TV
set and VESA holder (see Fig. 2). The VESA holder must not rest on
the rear panel.
When mounting the TV set, always check that all four Loewe VESA
adaptor bolts are used. For each mounting point, only one VESA
adapter bolt may be used. It is inadmissible to screw several VESA
adapter bolts or extend individual adapter bolts.
Measure the hole distance between the screwing points of your TV
set. A hole distance of 400 x 400 mm on the rear of the TV set means
VESA 400 standard.
Thus, a suitable mount bracket must also correspond to the VESA 400
standard. If the VESA standard of your TV set fits the standard of the
desired bracket, the bracket has also to be approved for the weight
and size of the TV set (for weight and TV set size refer to chapter
Technical Data).
Loewe is not responsible for the permissible load-carrying capacity
and the professional fixing of the holder.
Please observe additionally and definitely the points described in the
chapter on safety instructions.
If you use a Vesa mounting options from other manufacturers, you
can order the Vesa adapter bolts M6x32 (No. 90473.988) at your
authorized dealer of Loewe.
D
21
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
140
CA module error codes
In case of problems with a CA module, error codes are displayed by TV set. The following table from the CI specification shows the meaning
of the error codes.
Error
Code +
Error condition Error detec-
ted by
Host action CI Plus Module action Comments
00
N/A None None
01
CICAM CICAM goes to pass - through mode
(1
.
02
CICAM - CICAM goes to pass-through mode
(1
.
- a revocation notification message is displayed.
03
CICAM/Host - If EMI>0 CICAM goes to pass-through mode, otherwise
switches to DVB CI mode
- a response error notification message is displayed.
The service operator and CAS may
choose under what conditions to
descramble when operating in DVB
CI mode.
04
CICAM/Host - If EMI>0 CICAM goes to pass-through mode, otherwise
switches to DVB CI mode
- a response error notification message is displayed.
The service operator and CAS may
choose under what conditions to
descramble when operating in DVB
CI mode.
05
CICAM None Recommended:
- CICAM retries the download 2 times
- a response error notification message is displayed.
06
CICAM None Recommended:
- CICAM retries the download 2 times
- a response error notification message is displayed.
07
CICAM None Recommended:
- CICAM retries the download 2 times
- a response error notification message is displayed.
08
CICAM None CICAM goes to pass - through mode
09
CICAM/Host Host stops the CICAM. CICAM goes to pass - through mode
10
CICAM/Host Host stops the CICAM. CICAM goes to pass - through mode
11
CICAM/Host Host stops the CICAM. CICAM goes to pass - through mode
12
CICAM/Host Host stops the CICAM. CICAM goes to pass - through mode
13
Host Host stops the CICAM. None
14
Host Host goes to DVB-CI
mode
(2
.
None
15
Host Host stops the CICAM. None
16
CICAM None - CICAM goes to pass- through mode
- a response error notification message is displayed.
17
CICAM None - CICAM goes to DVB-CI mode
(3
- a response error notification message is displayed.
18
CICAM None - CICAM goes to pass- through mode
- a response error notification message is displayed.
19
CICAM None - CICAM goes to DVB-CI mode
(3
- a response error notification message is displayed.
20
CICAM None - CICAM goes to DVB-CI mode
(3
- a response error notification message is displayed.
21
CICAM None - CICAM goes to DVB-CI mode
(3
- a response error notification message is displayed.
22
CICAM Requires
Update
CICAM None - CICAM goes to pass- through mode
- a response error notification message is displayed.
23-127
Reserved for CI
Plus
CICAM None - a response error notification message is displayed.
128-255
Private Use for
Service Operator
CICAM None - a response error notification message is displayed.
(1
The CICAM relays the transport stream unaltered and does not descramble any services (CI Plus or DVB).
(2
The Host behaves like a DVB - CI compliant Host.
(3
The CICAM descrambles only services that require no CI Plus prote ction (DVB-CI fallback mode).
Miscellaneous
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
141
0-9
24p motion picture display: Movies released on Blu-ray Disc sup-
port the 24p motion picture display. The Blu-ray player transfers the
original film format to the television with 24 frames per second. The
DMM (DigitalMovieMode) set in the factory calculates and inserts
additional intermediate pictures, which suppress film jerking typical
for the cinema, thereby providing for a smooth motion sequence.
A
Accurate Recording: See Automatic time control.
Administrator: Person who administers the network, i.e. takes care of
setting up and maintaining all components belonging to the network.
Active antenna: An antenna with its own power supply or amplification
which can improve the reception in areas with a poor coverage.
ARC: Abbreviation for Audio Return Channel.
Audio Return Channel: The audio return channel which was introduced
with the HDMI Standard 1.4 is used when an audio system with audio
(pre) amplifier, e.g. Loewe MediaVision 3D, is connected to a TV set via
HDMI. The digital audio signal of the TV set (e.g. the sound of the cur-
rent TV program) can be transferred to the audio amplifier via the audio
return channel of the HDMI cable. Thus the same cable which is normally
responsible for transferring image data from a connected media player to
the TV set transfers the audio data in the opposite direction. In this way, the
audio return channel makes the cinch cable, which has previously been
required in addition to the HDMI cable, redundant.
Automatic time control: Also called Accurate Recording. Similar to
VPS for analogue stations the automatic time control monitors the start
and end times of programmes from DVB stations. If these times deviate
from the data programmed in the timer data, the running time of the
recording is adapted automatically. The automatic time control is not
supported by all DVB stations.
AV socket: Socket for audio and video signals.
AV sources: Audio/Video source.
AVI: Abbreviation for Audio Video Interleave, a video container file for-
mat developed by Microsoft. A single AVI video file can contain several
audio, video and text data streams (thus the name container format).
B
Band: Name for a transmission range.
Blu-ray Disc: The follow-up format of DVD. The contents of about
five DVDs fit onto one Blu-ray Disc (abbreviated BD). Therefore, the
Blu-ray disc provides enough space for high-resolution images and
multi-channel sound formats.
C
BMP: Abbreviation for Bitmap, a grid graphics format designed for
Microsoft Windows and OS/2 that is wide spread and therefore sup-
ported by almost every popular graphics software package without
any problems.
C
CA Module: The Conditional Access module contains the cod-
ing system and compares the transmitted code with the one on the
Smart Card. If they match, the appropriate stations or programmes
are decoded.
CEC: Abbreviation for Consumer Electronics Control. CEC provides uni-
versal component control functions for entertainment electronics devices
(e.g. System standby, One Touch Play). CEC is referred to by Loewe as
Digital Link HD.
Channel (WLAN): Devices that want to communicate with each other
have to use the same WiFi channel. In Europe the WiFi frequency band
is currently divided into 13 channels.
Cinch cable: Cable for transmitting sound or pictures.
CI slot: See Common Interface.
Client: Also called network client, describes an end device such as
your TV set that is connected to the network and gets data from a
(media) server to make it accessible to the user.
Common Interface: The Common Interface (CI slot) is a standard-
ised interface. By inserting suitable decoding modules (CA modules)
and a Smart Card coded digital programmes can be used.
Common Interface Plus: CI Plus is an advancement of the Common
Interface standard. CI Plus slots are in principle downward compatible
to the previous CI standard, i.e. CA modules and Smart Cards accord-
ing to the past CI standard can continue to be used in CI Plus slots,
as far as the programme provider permits this. Additionally, extended
regulations apply however to CI Plus.
Component: See Component connection.
Component connection: Also referred to as Component. Connec-
tion where the video signal is transferred via three separate (Cinch)
connections. It comprises the brightness signal Y as well as the colour
difference signals Pb (blue component) and Pr (red component).
Conditional Access module: See CA module.
D
DHCP: Abbreviation for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. DHCP
allows automatic assignment of IP addresses with the aid of a DHCP
server.
DHCP server: Network service which takes care of automatic assign-
ment of IP addresses to clients.
Digital Link HD: System for controlling units via the HDMI connection
of the Loewe TV set when they have been set up in a covered position.
DMM: Abbreviation for Digital Movie Mode. Whether a studio record-
ing, live broadcast, or feature film – the broadcast images are always
displayed optimally. Still images are reproduced in all their sharpness
and tranquillity. By creating intermediate images, DMM enables perfect
studio quality, even with quick movements.
DNC: Abbreviation for “Digital Noise Control”. Weak TV signals (ana-
logue) can generate disruptive picture noise. DNC adjusts the effect
of digital noise reduction to the picture contents.
DNS: Abbreviation for Domain Name System. Readable names (e.g.
www.loewe-int.de) are assigned to numerical IP addresses. DNS
servers are responsible for the resolution of readable addresses into
the corresponding IP addresses.
Dolby Digital: Digital multi-channel sound. The digital standard for
high quality home movie systems. The individual channels are broad-
cast separately in this standard. The three front channels right, left
and centre, the two surround channels right and left and the external
subwoofer channels are called a 5.1 signal.
Dolby Pro Logic: Analogue multi-channel sound. Converts a Dolby-
coded stereo signal into a surround sound. This usually contains four
channels (front left, centre, front right, surround channel). A special
subwoofer channel is not generated in this method.
Dolby Pro Logic II: Analogue multi-channel sound. Dolby Pro Logic II
is a further development of Dolby Pro Logic. This method generates
a 6-channel spatial sound from a stereo or Pro-Logic signal (front left,
centre, front right, surround left, surround right, subwoofer).
Dolby Surround: An analogue surround sound system which uses a
matrix coding to fit four sound channels into two sound tracks.
Dolby Virtual Speaker: The Dolby Virtual Speaker technology
simulates the surround playback of a real 5.1 channel playback with
only two speakers.
DRM: Digital Rights Management. Processes to control copyright
protected data. To be used correctly, DRM protected contents require
not only a DRM capable device but also the possession of a license
issued by the provider (to be paid for).
DTS: Digital Theatre Systems; Digital multi-channel audio.
Glossary
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
142
Glossary
D (continued)
DVB-C/-S/-T: Digital Video Broadcasting stands for digital television.
Technical DVB is the standardised process for transmitting digital
content (television, radio, multi-channel audio, room sound, EPG,
Teletext, and other supplemental services) through digital technology.
CST for terrestrial or antenna distribution.
DVD: Abbreviation for Digital Video Disc and later Digital Versatile Disc.
DVD preceiver: Combi device of DVD player and radio without inte-
grated amplifier.
Dynamic contrast ratio: Here the light intensity of the display is
adapted in case of a high black content in the picture. The so-called
backlights are dimmed automatically and the contrast ratio increases
temporarily, i.e. dynamically.
E
Electronic Programme Guide: See EPG.
EPG: Electronic Programme Guide is the electronic variant of a printed
TV guide. Using the EPG you can watch the TV programme of the TV
station, transfer the appropriate data. The list of programmes contains
the title, beginning and end and duration of the programme. In addition
brief descriptions of the content of the programmes are also displayed.
Ethernet: Cable linked data net technology for local networks (LANs).
Also covers standards for e.g. plug connectors and transfer speeds.
Euro AV socket: Interface for connecting video devices to a TV set.
This socket is also referred to as Scart socket.
Exif: Standard format for additional data with modern digital cameras,
e.g. date and time, aperture, light sensitivity, alignment of the camera
(portrait/landscape).
F
FLOF: Full Level One Facilities. Teletext system in which names and
numbers of the jump destinations are transmitted in the bottom line
on every page. This guides the reader to related topics for example. An
information about which pages exist and which pages have sub-pages
is not available in FLOF.
G
Gateway: Transition to another network; in this case connection from
the home network to the Internet.
The network device that establishes this connection is normally used
as a standard gateway. As a rule, the DSL router also represents the
Internet gateway.
H
HbbTV: HbbTV (Hybrid broadcast broadband television) is an industry
standard that offers an open platform for technology that is not depend-
ent on manufacturers. HbbTV combines TV programmes with online
services seamlessly over broadband Internet (DSL).
HDCP: High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection. Coding system
provided for the DVI and HDMI interfaces for secure transmission of
audio and video data.
HDMI: High Definition Multimedia Interface, represents a newly de-
veloped interface for the fully digital transfer of audio and video data.
HD Ready: A quality seal that is awarded to products that are capable
of displaying high-definition television (HDTV).
HDTV (HD): High Definition Television is a collective term, designating
a series of high-resolution television standards.
High and low band: Transmission ranges for satellites.
Host: Computer that the server services are provided from, i.e. that
makes data available. Refer also to media server.
I
ID3 tags: Additional information for MP3 and WMA audio files. Infor-
mation about the singer, title, album and album cover can be saved
here among other things. This data is then processed by the PC using
an ID3 tag editor.
IP address: IP addresses (Internet Protocol Addresses) are used to
identify devices in an Internet Protocol (IP) network. IP addresses are
made up of four groups of numbers of three digits each.
IR-Link: The IR Link function allows the operation of accessory de-
vices with concealed installation made by other manufacturers via the
Loewe TV set. The infrared sensor required for this is available as an ac-
cessory and can be connected to the IR-Link connection of the TV set.
J
JPEG/JPG: Joint Photographic Experts Group is a committee, which
has developed a standardised method for the compression of digital
images. This method JPEG (JPG for short), named after the commit-
tee, is a commonly used graphic format for photos.
L
LAN: Abbreviation for Local Area Network. Mainly used as a name for
networks with cabling (Ethernet).
LCD: Liquid Crystal Display.
LCN: Logical Channel Numbers. In stations with LCN, the channel
location number belonging to the station is also transmitted by the
provider. The stations are sorted according to these channel location
numbers.
LNB/LNC: The crucial electronic component of a satellite antenna
is referred to as an LNB (Low Noise Block Converter). It is mounted
in the focal point of a parabolic antenna. The designation LNC (Low
Noise Converter) indicates that conversion to a lower intermediate
frequency takes place. The supplemental block in the LNB refers to the
fact that a whole frequency range (a block) is converted in each case.
M
MAC address: Hardware address of a network adaptor, e.g., he net-
work card in the PC. It is issued permanently by the manufacturer and
is used to uniquely identify devices in networks.
Mbit/sec: Information about the transfer rate in networks in mega-
bits, i.e. millions of characters per second. With WLAN the maximum
speed is 11 (IEEE 802.11b), 54 (IEEE 802.11g), 300 (IEEE 802.11n) or
1300 (IEEE 802.11ac) Mbit/sec, in wired networks 10 Mbit/sec, 100
Mbit/sec (Fast Ethernet) or 1000-Mbit/s-Ethernet (Gigabit Ethernet).
Media Server: Stands for the device on which multimedia content
is stored, but is also the name for the service provided by the device
that makes this data available to the network.
Modulator: Transmitter in the video or DVD recorder so that the
devices can receive signals via the tuner of the TV device.
Mono: Single channel sound.
MP3: Data format for compressed audio files.
MPEG: Digital compression method for video.
Multimedia content: Videos, music files and photos are grouped
together under this term.
N
NAS: The term describes a hard disk which is independently linked
to the network (i.e. without a PC).
Network ID: NID refers to the so-called programme ID number, also
known as network ID – a number between 0 and 8191. This specifica-
tion is necessary in specific cable networks of some countries. Then
only DVB signals of this station network are searched for.
NICAM: Audio standard. Is used in Denmark, England, France, Swe-
den, and Spain.
NTSC: American colour standard, stands for National Television
Standards Committee.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
143
Glossary
P
Page Catching: For teletext, refers to marking and calling a page
number.
PAL: European colour standard, stands for phase alternation line.
PCM: Pulse Code Modulation for digital sound.
Picture in Picture: See PIP.
PIP: Picture in Picture; a function which displays two pictures on the
screen.
Pixel: Also called picture element or pel. Denotes both the smallest
unit of a digital graphic grid and its display on a screen with grid control.
Pixel error: A pixel error is a defective pixel, usually on an LCD. Pixel
errors may be caused by production errors. They are expressed for
example by a constantly lit pixel or a constantly black pixel. Single
defective pixels however are excluded from a guarantee.
PNG: Abbreviation for Portable Network Graphics, a freely available
grid graphics format for loss-free compression.
Port: It allows assignment of data packages to various services which
are running on one device under the same network address.
Powerline: Powerline designates a type of wired network connection
in which data is transferred via the domestic electricity network using
optionally available adaptors.
Progressive JPEG: Progressive JPEGs are built up gradually. The
quality of the picture increases progressively during the loading
process.
ProScan/Progressive Scan: Progressive Scan (abbr. PS) or full
picture method is a technique in the picture build-up of monitors, TV
sets, beamers, and other display devices in which the output device is
not sent line interlaced half pictures – unlike in the interlace technique
– but real full pictures.
PSK: Clients that wish to connect to a wireless network secured with
PSK must know this key.
R
RGB: Colour signals Red, Green and Blue.
Router: Device for connecting several networks, e.g., home network
and Internet.
S
Satellite tuner: Receiver for satellite programmes.
SDTV: Standard Definition TeleVision.
SECAM: French colour standard, stands for Séquentiel à mémoire.
Set-top box: Set-top box (STB for short) refers to a device in enter-
tainment electronics which is connected to another device, usually a
TV set, and offers the user additional functional options.
Signal input group: Depending on the applied signal, the signal
sources are divided into different groups.
Signal strength: Strength of the received antenna signal.
Signal quality: Quality of the incoming antenna signal.
Smart Card: The Smart Card is an electronic chip card issued by the
respective programme provider or by the certification free Pay TV
operators. It contains the code which is decoded by the CA module.
Static contrast ratio: Describes the relationship between the lightest
and darkest image display.
Stereo: Dual channel sound.
Switch: Device for connecting several computers to a network.
Switching voltage: Video devices supply this voltage to switch the
TV set to playback.
Symbol rate: Specifies the transmission speed for data transmission.
T
Terrestrial: In data transmission a wireless transmission that does
not use satellites as intermediate station is referred to as terrestrial.
TFT: Thin Film Transistor. One widely distributed application is control
of liquid crystal flat screens, for which a signal transistor is used for
each pixel. This design of display is also referred to as active matrix,
however it is frequently also referred to as TFT display.
Tuner: Another term for receiver.
U
Ultra HD: Ultra HD (abbr. for Ultra High Definition) is a digital high-
definition video format, which is about four times the resolution of
HDTV.
USB: Universal Serial Bus. Serial bus system for connecting external
devices (USB card reader, USB stick).
UPnP AV Is used to control network devices from all manufacturers.
Has become a widespread standard for home networking.
V
VGA: PC interface for connecting a monitor.
W
WEP: Abbreviation for Wired Equivalent Privacy. Former standard
process in the WiFi encryption, now outdated.
Wired network: see LAN.
Wireless network: see WLAN.
WLAN: Abbreviation for Wireless Local Area Network. Also abbrevi-
ated as wireless network.
WMA: Abbreviation for Windows Media Audio, Microsoft own audio
data format. As with MP3 files, the content is compressed here as well.
WMV: Abbreviation for Windows Media Video, proprietary Microsoft
video data format.
WPA: Abbreviation for Wi-Fi Protected Access. Replaced WEP as
standard encryption for wireless networks.
Y
Ycc/Ypp: Colour standards for Set-top boxes..
YCbCr: Digital colour model, informally also incorrect designation
for signals in standard resolution (SDTV). The YCbCr colour model,
in which, e.g., DVDs are coded, has been developed from the YUV
colour model used in analogue television technology. With YCbCr, the
data is transferred via digital interfaces such as DVI or HDMI without
being converted.
YPbPr: Analogue colour model, see also Component connection.
The analogue YPbPr signal is generated from the YCbCr signal by a
converter in the source player and then output at the 3 component
outputs of the source player.
YUV: The YUV colour model is used for analogue television in accord-
ance with the standards PAL and NTSC. YUV is often informally re-
ferred to when YPbPr (for analogue connections/cables) or YCbCr (in
digital applications) is actually meant. YUV only occurs in quadrature
modulation during PAL or NTSC transfer and is not otherwise used.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
144
EC Declaration of Conformity
Ɍɨɡɢɭɪɟɞɨɬɝɨɜɚɪɹɧɚ ɨɫɧɨɜɧɢɬɟ ɢɡɢɫɤɜɚɧɢɹ ɢɪɚɡɲɢɪɟɧɢɬɟ ɫɴɨɬɜɟɬɧɢ ɩɪɟɞɩɨɫɬɚɜɤɢȾɢɪɟɤɬɢɜɚ ȿ8 ȼɴɜ
Ɏɪɚɧɰɢɹɢɂɬɚɥɢɹɢɡɩɨɥɡɜɚɧɟɬɨɦɭɟɪɚɡɪɟɲɟɧɨɫɚɦɨɜɡɚɬɜɨɪɟɧɢɩɨɦɟɳɟɧɢɹ.
7RWR ]DĜt]HQt MH Y VRXODGX VH ]iNODGQtPL SRåDGDYN\ D RVWDWQtPL RGSRYtGDMtFtPL XVWDQRYHQtPL 6PČUQLFH (8.9H
)UDQFLLDY,WDOLLMHSRXåLWtSĜtVWURMHGRYROHQpMHQRPYLQWHULpUX.
Dieses Gerät entspricht den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den weiteren entsprechenden Vorgaben der Richtlinie
2014/53/EU. In Frankreich und Italien ist die Nutzung nur in Innenräumen zulässig.
Dette udstyr er i overensstemmelse med de væsentlige krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i Direktiv 2014/53/EU. I
Frankrig og Italien er det kun tilladt at anvende det indendørs.
Este equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales así como con otras disposiciones de la Directiva 2014/53/EU. En Francia
e Italia, su uso está permitido únicamente en espacios interiores.
Tämä laite täyttää direktiivin 2014/53/EU olennaiset vaatimukset ja on siinä asetettujen muiden laitetta koskevien määräys-
ten mukainen. Ranskassa ja Italiassa laitetta saa käyttää vain sisätiloissa.
Cet appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la 2014/53/EU. En France et
en Italie l‘utilisation est autorisée uniquement dans des espaces fermés.
This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU. In
France and Italy it may only be used indoors.
ǹȣIJȩȢȠİȟȠʌȜȚıȩȢİȓȞĮȚıİıȣȩȡijȦıȘİIJȚȢȠȣıȚȫįİȚȢĮʌĮȚIJȒıİȚȢțĮȚȐȜȜİȢıȤİIJȚțȑȢįȚĮIJȐȟİȚȢIJȘȢȅįȘȖȓĮȢ(8
ȈIJȘȞīĮȜȜȓĮțĮȚıIJȘȞǿIJĮȜȓĮİʌȚIJȡȑʌİIJĮȚȘȤȡȒıȘȝȩȞȠıİİıȦIJİȡȚțȠȪȢȤȫȡȠȣȢ.
Questo apparato é conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed agli altri principi sanciti dalla Direttiva 2014/53/EU. In Francia e in
Italia è consentito l‘uso solo in ambienti chiusi.
Dette utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i EU-direktiv 2014/53/EU
. I
Frankrike og Italia er kun innendørs bruk tillatt.
Dit apparaat voldoet aan de essentiele eisen en andere van toepassing zijnde bepalingen van de Richtlijn 2014/53/EU. In
Frankrijk en Italië is het gebruik slechts binnenshuis toegestaan.
Este aparelho está em conformidade com os requisitos fundamentais e todas as restantes disposições da Diretiva 2014/53/
EU. Em França e Itália a sua utilização apenas é permitida em espaços interiores.
Denna utrustning är i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga kraven och andra relevanta bestämmelser i Direktiv 2014/53/EU.
I Frankrike och Italien får apparaten användas endast inomhus.
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
145
Index
A
Access code .................................................................................... 84
Adding stations to personal list ...................................................... 80
Additional functions for DR+ archive playback ............................. 59
Adjusting the HiFi/AV amplifier ..................................................... 110
Adjusting the sound .........................................................................73
Adjust size of the PIP image ........................................................... 92
Allow switching voltage ...................................................................111
Antenna DVB .................................................................... 70, 105, 111
Antenna DVB-S ...............................................................................111
Antenna DVB-T ................................................................................111
App Gallery ...................................................................................... 65
Apps ............................................................................................31, 65
ARC .................................................................................................122
Archive recording ............................................................................ 44
Artist Search ................................................................................... 69
Audio commentary ......................................................................... 92
AUDIO key ......................................................................................124
Audio playback
Playback ....................................................................................... 62
Audio playback from external devices ..........................................123
Audio return channel .....................................................................122
Auto dimming .................................................................................. 70
Auto dimming - Room ..................................................................... 71
Automatic aspect ratio .................................................................... 71
Automatic menu info .......................................................................18
Automatic scan TV+Radio ....................................................... 70, 75
Automatic time control ................................................................... 53
Auto volume .................................................................................... 70
AV connecting setting .....................................................................111
AV connecting settings ........................................................... 70, 105
AV list ............................................................................................... 55
AV output signal .............................................................................. 70
B
Balance ...................................................................................... 70, 74
Bluetooth ................................................................................. 70, 103
Blu-ray player ..................................................................................117
Bookmarks
Delete ........................................................................................... 60
Delete individual ones ................................................................. 60
Jump ............................................................................................ 59
Set ..........................................................................................44, 59
Brightness ..................................................................................70, 71
Browser .............................................................................................67
C
Camcorder ......................................................................................117
CA modul ........................................................................................ 115
Change title of an archive recording ...............................................47
Changing the station list ................................................................. 32
Character table ................................................................................ 17
Cinema Surround ............................................................................74
CI slot .............................................................................................. 115
Cleaning and care ..............................................................................7
Clear data base ............................................................................... 83
Clock display .................................................................................... 18
Code number .................................................................................. 84
Color intensity ................................................................................. 70
Coloured keys .................................................................................. 39
Colour intensity ................................................................................ 71
Colour temperature ...................................................................70, 71
Common Interface Plus ................................................................. 115
Compatible mode .......................................................................... 112
Component connection ................................................................120
Connecting active loudspeakers ..................................................122
Connecting antennas ...................................................................... 12
Connecting HiFi/AV amplifier ........................................................122
Connecting home network .............................................................. 12
Connecting the speaker system (AUDIO OUT) ........................... 121
Connecting the speaker system (DAL) ........................................ 121
Connecting the TV set ..................................................................... 12
Connections .............................................................................. 10, 70
Contrast ......................................................................................70, 71
Control ............................................................................................. 70
Create new personal list ................................................................. 80
D
Data capture .................................................................................... 83
Deblocking filter .........................................................................70, 71
Delete
Bookmarks .................................................................................. 60
individual bookmarks ..................................................................60
Recording ......................................................................................47
Delete manager ............................................................................... 49
Set delete protection for timer recording .................................. 53
Setting/cancelling delete protection .......................................... 49
Delete personal list ......................................................................... 80
Deleting blocks .................................................................................79
Deleting stations from the personal list ........................................ 80
Devices on AV ................................................................................. 119
Digital Link ........................................................................70, 105, 112
Digital Link HD ................................................................................ 118
Digital Link HD functionality .......................................................... 112
Digital Noise Control (DNC) ......................................................70, 71
Direct recording .............................................................................. 44
Dolby PLII mode ...............................................................................73
DR+ .................................................................................................. 70
DR+ archive ..................................................................................... 46
DR+ Streaming .................................................................. 50, 70, 113
Notify started „Follow me“ recording ........................................ 94
DR+ Streaming settings ................................................................. 93
Also use other archives ............................................................... 94
DR+ device group name ............................................................. 94
DR+ device name ........................................................................ 94
DR+ standby ................................................................................ 94
IP port number ............................................................................ 94
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
146
Index
Share DR+ archive with other devices ....................................... 94
DVB character set ........................................................................... 92
DVB radio ......................................................................................... 68
DVB settings ..............................................................................70, 92
DVD player .......................................................................................117
E
Edit new personal list ...................................................................... 80
Edit personal list .............................................................................. 80
Energy efficiency ................................................................. 19, 70, 85
EPG ............................................................................................36, 70
Explanation of keys .......................................................................... 18
Explanation of symbols ...................................................................18
Export archive entries ..................................................................... 48
Export log file ............................................................................. 70, 97
Extras ........................................................................................70, 113
F
Favourites .........................................................................................31
Film quality improvement (DMM) ............................................70, 71
FLOF ................................................................................................. 39
Follow-Me function ...................................................................50, 56
Function list ..................................................................................... 35
Function of the TEXT key ................................................................ 95
G
Game console ......................................................................... 112, 117
Gaming mode ................................................................................. 112
Gamma brightness correction ..................................................70, 71
General information on menu operation ........................................ 15
H
Hard disks ..................................................................................70, 96
Checking ...................................................................................... 96
Formatting ................................................................................... 96
HbbTV ..................................................................................41, 70, 95
HbbTV-Modus ................................................................................. 95
HbbTV text .......................................................................................41
HDMI ................................................................................105, 112, 117
HDMI1-ARC Sound format ............................................................ 112
HDMI CEC ....................................................................................... 118
History ............................................................................................. 33
Home ................................................................................................31
Home Automation ......................................................................... 101
Home networking systems ...........................................................123
Home view ........................................................................................ 31
Host name ....................................................................................... 98
I
Image+ Active ............................................................................70, 71
Important hints ..............................................................................139
Initial installation ..............................................................................19
Initial installation wizard ..................................................................19
Installing the TV set ..........................................................................11
Instant Channel Zapping ................................................................ 32
Instant recording ............................................................................. 44
Integrated features ............................................................70, 113, 114
Internet radio ................................................................................... 69
Interval functions ............................................................................60
Deleting part of the recording .....................................................61
Hide .............................................................................................. 60
J
Jump .................................................................................................57
Jumping to Bookmarks .................................................................. 59
L
Language ..................................................................... 19, 70, 83, 127
Licence agreement ..........................................................................19
LNC/LNB .............................................................................24,
26, 27
Loewe App ......................................................................................132
Loudness ................................................................................... 70, 73
M
Mains switch .................................................................................9, 14
Manual scan TV ................................................................................75
Manuell scan (incl. antenna status) ............................................... 70
Maximum switch on volume .......................................................... 70
Maximum volume ..................................................................... 70, 74
MediaNet
Browse ......................................................................................... 66
Exit ................................................................................................ 65
Settings ........................................................................................ 66
Mobile phone keyboard ................................................................... 17
Mobile Recording .................................................................... 70, 102
Move block .......................................................................................79
Move picture up/down ...............................................................70, 71
Move stations in the personal list .................................................. 80
Moving of archive entries ............................................................... 48
Multimedia / Network .................................................................... 70
Multimedia settings .................................................................70, 101
Multi recording ................................................................................ 45
Multiroom .........................................................................................51
Multi select .......................................................................................47
Music playback
end ............................................................................................... 63
Repeat .......................................................................................... 63
Shuffle playback .......................................................................... 63
Winding ........................................................................................ 62
N
Network selection ......................................................................21, 22
Network settings .......................................................................70, 98
Neue Persönliche Liste anlegen ..................................................... 80
Notify hidden sections .................................................................... 93
Numerical keys ...........................................................................15, 32
O
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
147
Index
OLED calibration ............................................................................139
OLED Calibration ............................................................................. 70
OLED technology ...........................................................................139
One touch recording ....................................................................... 44
On/Off button .....................................................................................9
On-screen displays ................................................................... 70, 91
OPC ................................................................................................... 71
P
Page selection ................................................................................. 39
Parental lock ....................................................................... 49, 70, 84
PC .................................................................................................... 119
PC IN - Display .................................................................................. 71
Permanent clock display ................................................................. 18
Personal list ..................................................................................... 33
Add station .................................................................................. 80
Create new list .............................................................................80
Delete list ..................................................................................... 80
Delete station .............................................................................. 80
Move station ................................................................................ 80
Rename list .................................................................................. 80
Photo
Exit ................................................................................................ 64
Full-screen mode ......................................................................... 64
Rotate photo ................................................................................ 64
Slide show .................................................................................... 64
Picture .............................................................................................. 70
Picture adjustment ............................................................. 70, 71, 72
Picture format ..................................................................... 70, 71, 72
4:3 .................................................................................................72
16:9 ................................................................................................72
PALplus .........................................................................................72
Panorama .....................................................................................72
Zoom .............................................................................................72
Picture settings ................................................................................ 71
PIP ..............................................................................................42, 70
PIP Settings ..................................................................................... 92
Positioning/aligning the DVB-T antenna ....................................... 111
Post-record time ............................................................................. 93
Pre-record time ............................................................................... 93
Proxy server .............................................................................98, 100
Q
Quick start mode ......................................................................70, 85
R
Record conflict ................................................................................ 53
Recording ........................................................................................ 93
Recordings .......................................................................................31
Remote control ....................................................................8, 13, 124
Remote TV switch on of the TV set .............................................. 112
Renaming the HDMI port designation ...........................................117
Renaming the personal list ............................................................. 80
Renderer ...................................................................................70, 101
Repeat initial installation .................................................... 19, 70, 113
Reset to factory settings ..................................................70, 113, 114
Restore stations ...............................................................................79
Rotating the TV set ......................................................................... 40
S
Safety ..................................................................................................6
Satellite selection ......................................................... 24, 25, 26, 27
Satellite system ............................................................................... 23
Scrambled stations ............................................... 21, 22, 28, 76,
116
Search for artists ............................................................................ 69
Selecting a station out of the station list ....................................... 32
Select station .................................................................................. 32
using the numerical keys ............................................................ 32
via personal lists .......................................................................... 33
with P+/P- ................................................................................... 32
Serial interface RS-232C (RJ12) ...................................................123
Serial recording tolerance .............................................................. 93
Service ............................................................................................149
Set covers ..........................................................................................11
Setting the volume .......................................................................... 32
Set-top box ......................................................................................117
Sharpness ..................................................................................70, 71
Shutdown of the ext. device via TV button ................................... 112
signal type .......................................................................................111
Skin tone .....................................................................................70, 71
Smart Card ..................................................................................... 115
Smart jump ............................................................................... 57, 93
Software ........................................................................................... 70
Software download ......................................................................... 86
Software update
Automatic update via the internet ............................................. 90
Manually via Antenna .................................................................. 88
Via Antenna ................................................................................. 89
Via USB memory medium ..........................................................87
Sound ......................................................................................... 70, 73
Sound adjustment .................................................................... 70, 73
Sound components ................................................ 70, 105, 106, 121
Sound mode .............................................................................. 70, 73
Sound picture synchronisation ................................................ 70, 73
Sources .............................................................................................31
Standard Teletext ............................................................................ 70
Standby mode .................................................................................. 14
Start behaviour of HbbTV-stations ............................................... 95
Station lists Radio ...............................................................70, 75, 79
Station lists TV ....................................................................70, 75, 79
Stations ...................................................................................... 70, 75
Station search ................................................................................. 69
Status display .................................................................................. 34
STB key ...........................................................................................124
Stop recording early ....................................................................... 45
Subtitle ..........................................................................45, 61, 92, 93
Supply voltage 5V ........................................................................... 111
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
148
Surround Mode ............................................................................... 70
Surround modus ..............................................................................73
Switching off the TV set during recording ..................................... 45
Switch off .......................................................................................... 14
Switch on ..........................................................................................14
Switch-on volume ............................................................................74
Switch to live picture ....................................................................... 43
System settings .........................................................................31, 70
T
Teletext ............................................................................................ 39
Time and date ........................................................................... 70, 91
Time display .....................................................................................18
Timer ................................................................................................ 52
Timer Services ............................................................................ 54
Timer data ....................................................................................... 52
Automatic time control ............................................................... 53
Beginning ..................................................................................... 52
Date .............................................................................................. 52
Delete protection ......................................................................... 53
End ............................................................................................... 52
Favourite ...................................................................................... 53
Folder ........................................................................................... 52
Lock recording ............................................................................. 53
Recording subtitles ..................................................................... 53
Recording type ............................................................................ 52
Station .......................................................................................... 52
Timer list .......................................................................................... 52
Timer Services ................................................................................ 52
Time shift ......................................................................................... 43
TOP .................................................................................................. 39
Transfer all station lists ....................................................................75
TV ................................................................................................31, 32
TV key .......................................................................................13, 124
TV on when memorised ................................................................. 83
TV viewing with time shift ........................................................43, 44
U
Update station list automatically ............................................. 70, 75
UPnP ................................................................................................. 12
USB stick ......................................................................................... 86
V
Value-added service ....................................................................8, 41
VBD+ ................................................................................................. 71
VIDEO key .......................................................................................124
Video playback
Change picture format ................................................................ 59
Jump by entering a time ..............................................................57
Playback ....................................................................................... 56
Repeat .......................................................................................... 58
Selecting language/sound .......................................................... 59
Winding ........................................................................................ 58
Index
Viewing a locked movie .................................................................. 49
Viewing another movie from the archive during archive recording .
44
Volume adjustment .................................................................. 70, 73
W
Wake on LAN/WiFi .......................................................................... 98
Watching other stations during archive recording ....................... 44
WEB key function ............................................................................ 70
Y
YPbPr ..............................................................................................120
YUV .................................................................................................120
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
149
Service
Qualifi Pty Ltd
24 Lionel Road
Mt.Waverley VIC 3149 Australia
Tel +61-03-8542 1111
Fax +61-03-9543 3677
E-mail: info@qualifi.com.au
Loewe Opta Benelux NV/SA
Uilenbaan 84
2160 Wommelgem, België
Tel +32 - 3 - 2 70 99 30
Fax +32 - 3 - 235 48 37
E-mail: ccc@loewe.be
Telion AG
Rütistrasse 26
8952 Schlieren, Schweiz
Tel +41 - 44 732 15 11
Fax +41 - 44 732 15 02
E-mail: infoKD@telion.ch
GuoGuang Electric Co., Ltd.
No. 8 Jinghu Road, Xinya St, Huadu Reg.
GZ, PRC
Tel +86-(0)20-22675744
Fax +86-(0)20-22675744
E-mail:service@loewe-chn.com
Hadjikyriakos & Sons Ltd.
121 Prodromos Str., P.O Box 21587
1511 Nicosia, Cyprus
Tel +357 - 22 87 21 11
Fax +357 - 22 66 33 91
E-mail: service@hadjikyriakos.com.cy
BaSys CS s.r.o.
Sodomkova 1478/8
10200 Praha 10 - Hostivar,
Česká republika
Tel +420 234 706 700
Fax +420 234 706 701
E-mail: office@basys.cz
Loewe Technologies GmbH,
Customer Care Center
Industriestraße 11
96317 Kronach, Deutschland
Tel +49 9261 99-500
Fax +49 9261 99-515
E-mail: ccc@loewe.de
www.loewe-friends.de
EET Europarts
Loewe Denmark
Bregnerødvej 133 D
3460 Birkerød, Denmark
Tel +45 45 82 19 19
E-mail: info@eeteuroparts.dk
Gaplasa S.A.
Conde de Torroja, 25
28022 Madrid, España
Tel +34 - 917 48 29 60
Fax +34 - 913 29 16 75
E-mail: loewe@maygap.com
Loewe France SAS
Rue du Dépôt,
13 Parc de l l‘Europe, BP 10010
67014 Strasbourg Cédex, France
Tel +33 - 3- 88 79 72 50
Fax +33 - 3- 88 79 72 59
E-mail: loewe.france@loewe-fr.com
EET Europarts
Loewe Finland
Metsänneidonkuja 12
02130 Espoo, Finland
Tel +358 9 47 850 900
www.eeteuroparts.fi
Loewe UK Ltd
PO Box 220
Eastbourne
BN24 9GQ
UK
Tel +44 (0)333 123 0220
E-mail: enquiries@loewe-uk.com
Issagogiki Emboriki Ellados S.A.
321 Mesogion Av.
152 31 Chalandri-Athens, Hellas
Tel +30 - 210 672 12 00
Fax +30 - 210 674 02 04
E-mail: christina_argyropoulou@
isembel.gr
Plug&Play Ltd.
Bednjanska 8, 10000 Zagreb
Hrvatska (Kroatia)
Tel +385 1 4929 683
Fax +385 1 4929 682
E-mail: info@loewe.hr
Loewe Italiana S.r.L.
Via Monte Baldo 14/P
37069 Dossobuono di Villafranca di
Verona
Tel +39 - 045 82 51 690
Fax +39 - 045 82 51 622
E-mail: info@loewe.it
T. R. Electro Stereo Ltd.
Yad Harutzim 9
6770002 Tel Aviv
Israel
Tel +972 – 3 – 6091100
Fax +972 – 3 – 6092200
E-Mail: info@loewe.co.il
Nonplus Ultra Home Automation Pvt Ltd
First Floor, No. 615, Second Main Road
Indiranagar Stage I, Indiranagar
Bangalore 560038
India
Tel +91 80 41114599
E-mail: jimmy@nplusultra.in
Pars Royal Taramesh
LOEWE
#18 Elahiye St. bidar AVE.
Unit #1
Postal code : 1965915651
Tehran, Iran
Tel +98 21-22010298
E-Mail: info@tarameshgroup.com
JOR
ACCU-TECH Solutions Co.
1-Kharija Al-Ashja‘i Street
Jabal Al-Weibdeh
P.O.Box 9668 Amman 11191, Jordan
Tel: +962-6-465-9985
Fax: +962-6-465-0119
E-Mail: info@accutech-solutions.net
LOEWE Show Room
Olaya Street,
Near Kingdom Center Riyadh,
Saudi Arabia
P.O Box 92831, Riyadh 11663
Tel + 966-11-4640927
Fax +966-11-4640759
Email: hagop@sas-se.com
Mr. Hagop Julmekian
Dominterior SIA
A.Čaka iela 80
Rīga, LV-1011, Latvia
Tel +3 71 - 67 29 29 59
Fax +3 71 - 67 31 05 68
E-Mail: konstantin.golubev@loewe.lv
A Cappella Ltd.
Ausros Vartu 5, Pasazo skg.
01129 Vilnius, Lithuania
Tel +370 - 52 12 22 96
Fax +370 - 52 62 66 81
E-mail: info@loewe.lt
EET Europarts AS
Olaf Helsetsvei 6 (Vekstsenteret)
0694 Oslo, Norge
Tel +47 - 22919500
E-mail: salg@eeteuroparts.no
Gaplasa S.A.
Parque Suécia
Avda. do Forte, 3
Edificio Suécia I piso 1-2.07
2790-073 CARNAXIDE, Portugal
Tel +351 - 21 942 78 30
Fax +351 - 21 940 00 78
E-mail: geral.loewe@mayro.pt
3LOGIC Sp.z o.o.
ul. Zakopiańska 153
30-435 Kraków
Tel +48 - 12 640 20 00
Fax +48 - 12 640 20 01
www.3logic.pl
V2 Indonesia
5th Intiland tower
Jl. Jenderal Sudirman 32
Jakarta 10220, INDONESIA
Tel +62-21 57853547
E-mail: service@v2indonesia.com
I Control SAL
Gemmaizeh, Rmeil.
Building 328 1st Floor Beirut, Lebanon
Tel +961 1 446777 / 1 587446
Fax +961 1 582446
E-mail: info@icontrol-leb.com
Service Center Loewe
Aptekarsky per.4 podjezd 5A
105005 Moscow, Russia
Tel +7 - 499 940 42 32 ( ext. 454 )
Fax +7 - 495 730 78 01
E-mail: service@loewe-cis.ru
EET Europarts AB
Loewe Sweden
Box 4124
SE-131 04, Nacka, Sverige
Tel +46 - 8 507 510 00
E-mail: Kundservice@eeteuroparts.se
Atlas Care Centre
11 changi south street 3
#03-01 builders centre
Singapore 486122
Tel +65 - 6745 2028
Fax +65 - 6546 7861
E-mail: service@atlas-sv.com
ENKAY GROUP
SERVISPLUS MUSTERI HIZMETLERI
Alemdag Cad. Site Yolu No:18
Umraniye, Istanbul, TÜRKIYE
Tel 444 4 784
E-mail: info@servisplus.com.tr
Volco Enterprise Close Corporation
Unit 8
7 on Mastiff (Road)
Longlake Ext 1, Lingbro Business Park
2165 Johannesburg
Tel +27 11 608 1228
Fax +27 11 608 1740
E-mail: service@volco.co.za
© by Loewe Technologies 19.06.17
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
150
STB
ABSAT 166, 169
AEGIR 179
AIWA 141
AKAI 033, 104
ALBA 060, 017, 067, 104,
111, 126, 180, 201
ALCATEL 336
ALDES 133, 168, 179, 201
ALLSAT 033, 048, 059, 077, 201
ALLSONIC 133, 168, 226
ALLTECH 060, 137, 225
ALPHA 033
ALTAI 047
AMITRONICA 060
AMPERE 047, 186, 207
AMSTRAD 060, 006, 047, 071, 097,
132, 165, 174, 175, 186,
212, 216, 217, 227, 228
ANGLO 060
ANKARO 060, 051, 133,
161, 162, 168, 226
ANTTRON 017, 077, 180
APOLLO 017
ARCON 025, 051, 079, 132, 136, 161
ARMSTRONG 033, 175
ARTHUR MARTIN 130
ASA 009
ASAT 025, 033
ASLF 060
AST 127, 194
ASTACOM 171, 172
ASTON 032, 095
ASTRA 013, 021, 025, 098, 099
164, 175, 178, 190, 222, 223
ASTRO 006, 091, 094, 176,
177, 179, 180, 181
AUDIOTON 059, 180
AUSTAR 212, 332
AVALON 047
AXIS 054, 210, 223, 226
BARCOM 021, 051
BEKO 067
BEST 051, 226
BIRMINGHAM CABLE 343
BLAUPUNKT 090, 176
BLUE SKY 060, 217
BOCA 163, 169, 175, 186,
199, 207, 222
BRAIN WAVE 094, 161
BRANDT 069
BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING 050, 227
BRITISH TELECOM 341
BROADCAST 013
BROCO 060, 223
BRUNS 133
BSKYB 227
BT 104, 171, 172, 229, 335
BT SATELLITE 171
BUBU SAT 060
BUSH 048, 077, 106, 126
BVV 161
CABLETIME 308, 311, 312, 333, 334
CAMBRIDGE 006, 104, 199
CANAL 019
CANAL DIGITAL 128
CANAL PLUS 128, 019, 320, 321
CANAL SATELLITE 128, 191, 211
CANARY 137
CARAT.SOM 054
CHAPARRAL 012, 134
CHESS 197
CITYCOM 135, 164, 203, 204, 230
CLARK 180
CLATRONIC 094
CLEMENS KAMPHUS 133, 210
CLYDE CABLE VISION 317
CNT 179
COMCAST 004
COMCRYPT 320, 321
COMMANDER 161, 162
COMMLINK 168
COMMUNICADO 054
COMTEC 054, 168
CONDOR 164, 226
CONNEXIONS 047, 096, 226, 231
CONRAD 006, 010, 164, 169, 226, 230
CONTEC 054, 135, 169
COSAT 059
CROWN 175
CRYPTOVISION 067, 315
CYBERMAXX 116
CYRUS 037
DAERYUNG 047
DAEWOO 060, 017, 025
DANSAT 048, 077
DAUMLING 163
D-BOX 045, 214
DECCA 038
DECSAT 310
DECSAT CANAL 310
DELFA 212
DEUTSCHE TELEKOM 056
DEW 025, 054
DIAMOND 225
DIRECTV 144
DISCOVERER 197
DISEQC 171, 172
DISK EXPRESS 051
DISMOND 225
DISTRATEL 119, 146, 147, 149, 185, 217
DISTRISAT 033, 059
DNR 161
DNT 033, 037, 047, 231
DRAKE 029
DST 017
DUAL 025
DUNE 226
DYNASAT 196
ECHOSTAR 060, 021, 047, 086,
088, 128, 211, 213
EIF 014, 198
EINHELL 060, 006, 017, 097, 163,
168, 169, 175, 186, 222
ELEKTA 179
ELSAT 071
ELTA 017, 033, 059, 226
ELTASAT 059
EMANON 017
EMME ESSE 133, 213, 226
ENGEL 060
EP SAT 067
EURIEULT 185, 217
EUROCRYPT 021, 067
EURODEC 110, 232
EUROPA 006, 033, 161,
162, 164, 169, 212
EUROPEAN 163
EUROSAT 175, 225
EUROSKY 164, 175, 186, 226
EUROSTAR 164, 215, 233, 234
EUTRA 137, 203
EXATOR 017, 104, 180
FAGOR 059
FERGUSON 023, 048, 067, 077,
106, 108, 111, 124, 206
FIDELITY 006, 071, 097
FILMNET 318
FINLANDIA 021, 067
FINLUX 009, 010, 021, 067, 220
FINNSAT 110
FLAIR MATE 060
FORCE 068
FOXTEL 235, 022, 319
FRACARRO 017, 087, 196, 213
FRANCE TELECOM 344
FREECOM 017, 193, 201
FREESAT 137
FTE 060, 080, 136, 137, 169,
196, 199, 212, 226
FUBA 010, 014, 017, 021, 047,
051, 088, 135, 176, 220, 226
G SAT 077, 130
GALAXI 051
GALAXIS 054, 059, 133, 161, 168,
209, 210, 211, 212, 223,
226, 236, 237, 238
GALAXISAT 127
GARDINER 204
GEC 317
GENIX 024
GENERAL-INSTRUMENTS 332
GIUCAR RECORD 089
GMI 175
GOLDBOX 128, 191, 211
GOODMANS 067, 111
GRAETZ 088, 099
GRANADA 021, 099
GRANDIN 185, 239
GROTHUSEN 017, 193
GRUNDIG 026, 003, 067, 090, 097,
171, 172, 176, 217, 227,
240, 241, 242, 020, 307, 316
HANSEATIC 197
HANTOR 017, 094
HANURI 179
HARTING UND HELLING 133
HASE & IGEL 161
HELIOCOM 164
HIGH PERFORMANCE 085, 122
HINARI 017, 077
HIRSCHMANCE 090
HIRSCHMANN 006, 009, 010, 047, 081,
113, 133, 171, 172, 176,
196, 203, 216, 219, 243
HISAWA 094
HITACHI 067, 106, 111, 120
HNE 165
HOUSTON 059, 071, 161, 162, 171
HUMAX 212, 236, 244, 005
HUTH 013, 054, 059, 094, 133,
136, 161, 162, 163, 164,
168, 169, 175, 186
HYPERVISION 345
ICX 138
IKUSI ALLSAT 136
IMEX 185
IMPERIAL 126
INGELEN 088, 099
INNOVATION 116
INTERNATIONAL 186
INTERTRONIC 175
INTERVISION 042, 059, 164, 170
INVIDEO 213
ITALTEL 213
ITT 021, 067, 088, 099, 120, 123
ITT NOKIA 009, 010, 021, 067, 088,
099, 120, 123, 214
JEEMON 059
JERROLD 138, 330, 332, 341, 343
JOHANSSON 059, 094
JOK 171, 172, 200, 229
JSR 059
JVC 003, 104
KABELVISION 330
KAMM 060, 215
KATHREIN 060, 033, 037, 080, 081,
090, 091, 094, 096, 112,
114, 135, 166, 176, 180,
196, 204, 218, 245, 246
KEY WEST 163
KOLON 017
KONIG 164
KOSCOM 210
KOSMOS 080, 081, 133, 193
KR 059, 137, 180, 203
KREISELMEYER 176
K-SAT 060
KYOSTAR 017, 180
KYOTO GMI ATLAN 143
L&S ELECTRONIC 226
LASAT 054, 164, 175, 179,
186, 199, 222, 226
LEMON 161, 162, 247
LENCO 060, 017, 025, 079, 161,
162, 164, 193, 221, 223, 226
LENNOX 042, 059
LENSON 006
LEXUS 033
LEYCO 104
LG (GOLDSTAR) 079, 107, 193
LIFESAT 197, 226
LIFETEX 116
LOKIA 088
LORENZEN 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 186
LORRAINE 193
LUPUS 226
LUXOR 006, 010, 021, 088, 097,
099, 120, 123, 130, 214
LYONNAISE 110
M&B1 197
MACAB 225, 232, 248, 329
MAGAI 080
MANATA 060, 171, 172
MANHATTAN 042, 059, 067, 106,
111, 151, 171, 172,
179, 210, 221
MARANTZ 033, 037
MASCOM 081
MASPRO 060, 026, 003, 093, 096,
106, 108, 113, 137, 161,
176, 242
MASTER_S 135
MATSUI 003, 109, 171, 172, 176
MAX 164
MB 197
MEDIABOX 191, 211
MEDIAMARKT 175
MEDIASAT 006, 128, 191, 211, 223
MEDION 060, 226
MEDISON 060
MEGA 033
MELECTRONIC 204
MEMPHIS 054, 134
METRONIC 060, 017, 117, 119, 121,
131, 146, 147, 149, 151,
152, 153, 154, 156, 157,
168, 175, 179, 180, 185,
204, 217
METZ 090, 176
MICRO 164, 180
MICRO ELECTRONIC 060
MICRO MAXX 116
MICRO STAR 116
MICRO TEC 060
MICRO TECHNOLOGY 060, 190, 223
MICRONIK 249
MINERVA 003, 090
MITSUBISHI 067, 090
MITSUMI 222
MNET 320, 321, 342
MORGAN 060, 033, 059, 132, 163,
169, 175, 186, 199, 207,
222, 250
MOVIE TIME 328
MR ZAPP 329
MULTICHOICE 100, 235
MULTISTAR 080
MURATTO 127, 193
MYRYAD 037
MYSAT 060
NAVEX 094
NEC 030, 073
NEIRU 079
NETA P 140
NETWORK 077
NEUHAUS 060, 006, 059, 161,
162, 164, 169, 210, 223,
NEUSAT 060, 161, 210
NEXTWAVE 138
NIKKO 060, 175, 201
NOKIA 009, 010, 021, 045, 067,
088, 099, 105, 120, 123,
211, 214, 242, 251, 346
NOMEX 221
NOOS 329
NORCO 221
NORDMENDE 017, 067, 179, 206
NOVIS 094
NSC 328
NTC 133, 203
NTL CABLETELL 332
OCEANIC 225
OCTAGON 017, 025, 054, 161, 162, 180
OKANO 080, 133, 175
OLYMPIC 133
ONDIGITAL 187, 188, 189
ONO 301
OPTEX 059, 135, 196, 208
Code page
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
151
OPTIMA 133
OPTUS 332
ORBIT 025, 194
ORBITECH 006, 017, 103, 169, 181, 224
ORIGO 126, 221
OSAT 097
OTTO VERSAND 090
OXFORD 104
PACE 001, 022, 044, 048, 050,
067, 077, 098, 108, 124,
189, 202, 227, 242, 252,
253, 319, 347
PACIFIC 225
PACKSAT 171, 172
PALCOM 092
PALLADIUM 003, 006, 017, 175
PALSAT 006
PANASAT 235, 254
PANASONIC 031, 067, 124, 227
PANDA 021, 048, 067, 164, 176, 210
PATRIOT 104
PHILIPS 026, 003, 033, 037, 051,
067, 077, 124, 128, 144,
156, 161, 162, 169, 171,
172, 176, 180, 187, 188,
191, 204, 211, 218, 229,
242, 313, 323, 329, 345
PHOENIX 054, 077
PHONOTREND 042, 059, 133,
142, 168, 212
PIONEER 128, 191, 211, 302
PIXX 255
PLANET 126, 213
POLSAT 110
POLYTRON 047, 135
PREDKI 017, 094
PREISNER 047, 103, 163, 169,
175, 186, 199, 222
PREMIER 059, 133
PREMIERE 191, 211, 214, 007
PROMAX 067
PROSAT 168, 170
PROSONIC 165
PROTEK 225
PROVISAT 201
PROVISION 179
PVP STEREO VISUAL 330
PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX 341
PYE 003
PYXIS 208, 210
QUADRAL 168, 169, 170,
171, 172, 173, 226
QUELLE 090, 097, 164, 165
QUIERO 110
RADIOLA 033, 037
RADIX 047, 137, 216
RAINBOW 137, 180
RC 138
RC-1000 104
RED STAR 226
REDPOINT 223
REDSTAR 226
RFT 033, 037, 161, 162, 168, 224
ROADSTAR 060
ROVER 060, 170
SABA 077, 108, 161, 164,
171, 172, 179, 200,
201, 206, 217, 229
SABRE 067
SAGEM 205, 329
SAKURA 054, 057
SALORA 021, 088, 099, 120, 130, 303
SAMSUNG 017, 080, 127, 132,
211, 243, 302, 324
SAT 006, 071, 127, 194
SAT PARTNER 017, 094, 133,
179, 180, 193, 201
SAT TEAM 060
SATBOX 304
SATCOM 013, 164, 197
SATEC 060, 077, 242
SATECO 017
SATELCO 226
SATFORD 013
SATLINE 170
SATMASTER 013
SATPARTNER 017, 079, 094, 133, 179,
180, 193, 201
SATSTATION 151
SAVA 077, 108, 161, 164, 171,
172, 179, 200, 201, 206, 217
SCHACKE 180
SCHAUB LORENZ 088, 099
SCHNEIDER 171, 172, 218
SCHWAIGER 077, 114, 135, 161, 164,
169, 197, 217, 255
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 305, 306, 325, 326
SEDEA-ELECTRONIQUE 017
SEEMANN 047, 104, 175, 223
SEG 017, 094, 165,
178, 190, 197, 226
SELECO 059, 213
SEPTIMO 146, 151, 154
SERVI SAT 059
SIEMENS 090, 176, 199
SILVA 079, 193
SINTRACK 013
SKANTIN 060
SKARDIN 223
SKINSAT 006
SKR 060
SKY 034, 050, 189, 227, 001
SKY MASTER 060, 133, 168,
170, 197, 215
SKY PLUS 002
SKYLAB 051
SKYMAX 033
SKYSAT 197
SKYVISION 059
SL 161, 165, 175, 186
SM ELECTRONIC 060
SMART 186
SONY 067, 211, 227
SR 222
STARLAND 060
STARRING 094
STARSAT 080
STRONG 017, 025, 179, 180, 186,
196, 211, 226, 235
STS 328
STV 014
STVI 014, 137
SUMIDA 175
SUNNY SOUND 226
SUNSAT 060, 223
SUNSTAR 163, 175, 186, 222, 226
SUPERCABLE 343
SUPERNOVA 189
TAGRA 059
TANDBERG 008
TANDY 085, 122
TANTEC 067, 108
TATUNG 067
TCM 116
TECHNILAND 013, 059
TECHNISAT 006, 028, 033, 047, 102
103, 181, 184, 224, 231
TECHNOWELT 164
TECO 025, 175, 222
TELASAT 164, 197
TELECIEL 180, 201
TELECOM 060
TELEDIREKT 077
TELEFUNKEN 017, 083, 171 , 172
TELEKA 026, 006, 047, 081, 103,
180, 161, 164, 175, 203, 210
TELEMASTER 179
TELEMAX 018
TELEPIU 320, 321
TELE PLUS ONE 320, 321
TELESAT 164, 197
TELESERVICE 311, 314
TELESTAR 006
TELETECH 215
TELEVES 006, 067
TELEWIRE 059
TENSAI 025, 094
TEVION 116
THOMSON 060, 049, 067, 128,
155, 164, 171, 172,
191, 205, 206, 211
THORENS 225
THORN 067
THORN-FERGUSON 023, 048, 067
TIOKO 135, 175
TLEWIRE 059
TOKAI 033
TONNA 060, 006, 013,
059, 067, 171, 210
TOPFIELD 011
TORX 341
TOSHIBA 067, 145
TPS 129, 205
TRENDLINE 222
TRENDPLAIN 222
TRGRA 088
TRIAD 085, 101, 127, 193, 194
TRIASAT 006, 220
TRIAX 060, 006, 033,
047, 211, 220, 230
TRISTAR 025
TUDI 327
TWINNER 115, 119
UNIDEN 058, 071, 080, 148, 208
UNISAT 033, 054, 175
UNITED CABLE 330, 341
UNITOR 051, 094
UNIVERSUM 003, 009, 071,
164, 165, 176
VAIADIGITAL 078
VARIOSAT 176
VARIOSTAT 176
VECTOR 178
VENTANA 033, 037
VESTEL 165
VIASAT 016
VIDEOCRYPT 023
VIDEOTRON 331
VIDEOWAY 331
VIDIO WAY 015
VIPER 054
VIRGIN MEDIA 063
VISIOPASS 309, 313, 329
VISIOSAT 060, 194, 200
VIVA 161, 162
VORTEC 017, 082, 083, 132, 142
VTECH 127, 194, 200, 204
WELA 060, 163, 169, 186
WESTMINSTER 335
WETEKOM 006, 197, 207
WEWA 067
WIBO 175
WINERSAT 094
WINTERGARTEN 168
WISI 006, 047, 067, 088,
123, 127, 164, 169,
176, 194, 200, 210
WITTENBERG 071
WOLSEY 085, 122
WOORISAT 179
WORLD 094
WORLDSAT 171, 172
XCOM 169
XCOM MULTIMEDIA 046
XRYPTON 226
XSAT 060, 046, 166, 169
YES 189
ZAUNKONIG 161
ZEHNDER 051, 080, 114, 127, 135
165, 179, 204, 226, 255
ZENITH 034, 314
ZETA-TECHNOLOGY 033
ZODIAC 180
ZWERGNASE 163, 175
Code page
Loewe bild 5 oled / bild 4 oled
User handbook
152
Notes
46

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Loewe Bild 5.55 set bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Loewe Bild 5.55 set in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 7,03 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Loewe Bild 5.55 set

Loewe Bild 5.55 set Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 164 pagina's

Loewe Bild 5.55 set Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 155 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info